MHI

r »py 3

MANUAL
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY FIELD

MHI
Copy 3
ENGINEER
SHORE
BATTALION

VJiil2AL USE CK

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY • AUGUST 1954

 FM 5-156

FIELD MANUAL! DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

No. 5-156 f WASHINGTON 25, D. C., 10 August 1954

ENGINEER SHORE BATTALION

Paragraphs Page
PART ONE. INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER 1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE_ 1-3 5
2. AMPHIBIOUS OPERA
TIONS--........___._ 4-11 7
3. AMPHIBIOUS SUPPORT
BRIGADE.............. 12-18 20
PART Two. ORGANIZATION AND
OPERATIONS
CHAPTER 4. ORGANIZATION
Section I. General........____..... 19-27 29
II. Headquarters and Service
Company___..._..... 28-42 36
III. Engineer Shore Company__ 43-52 41
CHAPTER 5. COMMAND AND STAFF
RESPONSIBILITIES
Section I. Battalion Commander_____ 53-56 47
II. Battalion Staff..._____... 57,58 49
III. Administration.-.-----.-... 59 50
IV. Operations and Intelligence.- 60, 61 51
V. Supply------------------ 62-65 53
VI. Maintenance___.......... 66-71 55
VII. Communications.---------. 72-74 62
VIII. Medical...-............... 75,76 63
CHAPTER 6. PREPARATIONS FOR AM
PHIBIOUS OPERATION
Section I. General....____....___ 77-89 65
II. Planning for Beach Opera
tions_---------_.__ 90-95 77
III. Shore Party Preparations.-. 96-100 85
IV. Rehearsals___..._... 101-107 88

305640 54
 Paragraph Page
CHAPTEB 7. EMBARKATION
Section I. General.----.,-----.---- 108 90
II. Near-Shore Operations-... 109-111 92
III. Loading..-----.--.-----. 112-118 95
IV. Loading Procedure------- 119-121 105
V. Voyage to Landing Area,. 122-127 107
CHAPTER 8. DEBARKATION
Section I. General--.----..._.... 128-134 112
II. Ship-to-Shore Movement-. 135, 136 124
III. Breaching Operations....- 137-140 126
CHAPTEK 9. BEACH OPERATIONS
Section I. Initial Actions Ashore.-.-- 141-145 132
II. Beach Support Area- ___ 146-163 143
III. General Unloading-_______ 164-172 173
IV. Shore Party Administration 173-179 190
V. Defense of Beach Support
Area__..._____ 180-184 195
VI. Base Development___... 185-187 201
CHAPTER 10. RETROGRADE MOVE
MENTS
Section I. General......___.... 188-193 205
II. Conduct of Withdrawal-.. 194-201 208
CHAPTER 11. OTHER ASPECTS OF OP
ERATIONS
Section I. Shore-to-Shore Operations. 202-206 212
II. Night Landings..._-_ 207-211 216
III. Jungle Operations ______ 212-217 220
IV. Arctic Operations___._ 218-228 224
V. Effects of Special Weapons 229-237 231
PART THREE. TRAINING
CHAPTER 12. PRESCRIBED TRAINING
Section I. General..__.._____ 238-244 239
II. Advanced Unit Training_ 245-248 242
CHAPTER 13. POSTCYCLE TRAINING!
Section I. General... __. __ __..- 249-252 244
II. Operational Shore Party
Training. _-______--__. 253-260 247
 Page
APPENDIX I. TYPICAL SHORE PARTY OR-
GANIZATIONS_-_____-_-.____ 253
II. SAMPLE DIVISION SHORE
PARTY PLAN-----.-.------.- 260
III. CHARACTERISTICS OF SHIPS
AND CRAFT EMPLOYED IN
AMPHIBIOUS OPERATIONS- faces262
IV. SUGGESTED FORM FOR SHORE
PARTY SOP— .......--..-... 263
V. GLOSSARY OF TERMS.—-.... 265
VI. REFERENCES—--- — — ---. — _ 296
INDEX--..---------..-.-_--__-.---._.----.--- 301
 PART ONE

INTRODUCTION

CHAPTER 1

PURPOSE AND SCOPE

1. Purpose
This manual explains the organization and em
ployment of the engineer shore battalion. It will
serve as a guide to the effective training and employ
ment of the battalion, and as a reference for command
and staff officers charged with its proper employment
in operations.
2. Scope
a. The organization, equipment, training and em
ployment of the engineer shore battalion are dis
cussed, with specific attention to—
(1) Performance, when reinforced with attached
units, of shore party work during a joint
amphibious operation in support of one in
fantry division.
(2) Performance of shore party work during a
shore-to-shore assault operation in support
of one regimental combat team.
(3) Performance of general engineer work in
the improvement and expansion of the beach
support area.
(4) Combat, with attached units, in the beach
support area.
 5. Information contained in the manual is based
upon current T/O & E's, as amended to 16 April 1953.
Since organization and equipment are not discussed
in detail, minor changes in T/O & E's will not alter
the methods and principles presented in the text.
G. Part one is devoted to introductory material;
part two, to organization and operations, and part
three, to training.
d. In applying the techniques recommended in this
manual, it must be remembered that each amphibi
ous operation presents distinct problems, and that
there is no approved solution or rigidly established
formula that inevitably will insure success. Person
nel and equipment must be employed to meet the de
mands of the specific situation. The information
presented here is based largely upon combat experi
ence, and summarizes official opinion as of the time
of publication. It must be emphasized that no final
and arbitrary rules can be laid down for the employ
ment of the engineer shore battalion; no manual, how
ever carefully conceived, can be a substitute for in
dividual ingenuity and initiative.
3. References
General information about amphibious operations'
is given in the manual when it serves to clarify the
text. More detailed material will be found in FM
31-5, and in the 60-series manuals. A list of ref
erences is included as appendix VI.
 CHAPTER 2

AMPHIBIOUS OPERATIONS

4. Definitions
An amphibious operation is a landing, made from
ships or craft to achieve an objective on land, in
which the forces involved are dependent primarily
upon waterborne means for transport to the objec
tive area, for initial tactical and logistical support,
and in which special techniques and equipment are
used in debarking on a shore. The operation is a
joint one when the assigned forces are composed of
more than one service of the Department of Defense.
It is a combined operation when the forces belong to
two or more allied nations.
5. Purposes
Amphibious operations may have one or more of
the following purposes:
a. Invasion. An invasion is a large-scale opera
tion to seize and secure a beachhead from which to
launch and support a major land offensive.
6. S&izwre. A seizure is a limited-objective opera
tion to seize and secure a land area for use as an air,
naval, or logistical base to support further opera
tions, or to deny use of the area to the enemy.
c. Raid. A raid is a sudden attack, usually by a
small force, involving the temporary seizure of a
limited objective, or a swift penetration into hostile
territory to secure information, confuse the enemy,
or destroy installations. It ends with a planned
withdrawal when the missions are completed.
 d. Demonstration. A demonstration is an opera
tion intended to confuse the enemy, delay or reduce
the effectiveness of his defense dispositions, or cause
him to commit his reserves. When the demonstrat
ing force is capable of landing enough strength to
exploit a favorable situation, this operation is termed
a demonstration in force. A large-scale demonstra
tion may include heavy naval gunfire, and the actual
ship-to-shore movement of landing craft toward the
beaches.
6. Types of Movement
Amphibious operations are classified as either
ship-to-shore, shore-to-shore, or a combination of
both.
a. SMp-to-STiore. This term describes any opera
tion requiring the transfer of troops, supplies, and
equipment from ocean-going vessels into smaller
landing craft or amphibious vehicles for movement
to the beaches.
5. Shore-to-Shore. In a shore-to-shore movement,
the landing force is transported directly from the
embarkation area to the beaches without transfer at
sea.
c. Combinations. An amphibious operation may
involve both types of movement. Shore-to-shore
techniques may be used in subsidiary interisland or
seaborne flanking operations, and in special opera
tions on rivers and lakes. These operations may be
conducted with or without naval support (ch. 11).
7. Phases of Joint Operation
An amphibious operation begins with the initial
directive or order from the theater commander,
which states the purpose of the operation, the forces
available, and the command responsibility. The
directive includes staff studies, outline plans, in
telligence, and other applicable information. The
operation is divided into four phases, which may
overlap in time.
a. Preparatory Phase. This phase begins when
the operation is first conceived, and ends when the
forces have completed embarkation. It may extend
from about D minus 90 to D minus 10. During this
period, plans are prepared and details are coordi
nated among the Army, Navy, and Air Force com
ponents. The forces taking part are assembled, or
ganized into a task force, and jointly trained.
Rehearsals are held, and the participating units are
equipped, staged, and embarked. Meanwhile, such
prelanding operations as the following are con
ducted :
(1) Air, naval, and clandestine ground and
beach reconnaissance of the objective area.
(2) Air attaclgs against enemy airfields and
other targets.
(3) Naval bombardment of the objective area.
(4) Mine sweeping and underwater demolition
operations in the landing area by naval
forces supported by air and naval gunfire.
(5) Seizure of outlying islands before D-day
for use of logistical, air, or seaplane bases,
radar warning stations, or position areas
for supporting artillery, or neutralization
to prevent enemy use, when assistance
gained by such action will outweigh the
tactical surprise lost.
 (6) Jfsychological warfare, sabotage, and sub
versive and espionage activity in the ob
jective area.
(7) Demonstrations outside the designated
landing area; for example, naval bombard
ment of enemy defenses elsewhere to draw
enemy attention away from the planned
assault area.
l>. Movement Phase. When embarkation is com
pleted, the landing force moves to the objective area
under control of the senior Navy commander. The
movement phase includes preliminary operations in
the objective area and elsewhere to assist in the
landing. These prelanding activities consist of re
connaissance, mine sweeping, naval and air bombard
ment, demolition of underwater obstacles, and simi
lar operations to facilitate the assault landing. The
movement phase may cover the period from D minus
10 to D-day.
c. Assault Phase. This phase begins when the
Navy and Air Force components of the joint force
are in position to support the Army assault forces,
and ends when the force beachhead is established.
It may extend from D-day to D plus 5. The se
quence of assault phase activities is generally as
follows:
(1) Arrival of the joint amphibious force in
the landing area.
(2) Intense pre-H-hour naval gunfire and air
bombardment of the objective area.
(3) Debarkation of assault troops from ships
into landing craft and landing vehicles,
their formation into waves, and movement

10
 to the beach. Continued naval and air
bombardment of beach targets.
(4) Naval gunfire lifts to inland and flanking
targets as the leading waves near the beach;
air units make final strafing runs on beach
defenses; fire support craft take over close
supporting fire missions.
(5) Assault waves land, breach beach obstacles,
overrun beach defenses, and destroy local
enemy forces and installations.
(6) Force ashore is rapidly built up by com
mitting reserves to exploit success where the
advance is most rapid.
(7) Assault platoons and companies quickly re
organize, repulse local counterattacks, and
seize initial objectives.
(8) Initial shore party equipment and supplies
land, and shore organization begins.
(9) When the initial assault tasks are accom
plished, the advance continues, to secure the
beach from enemy direct fire. Shore or
ganization continues.
d. Final Phase. The final phase begins when the
task force beachhead is established, and ends when
the normal logistical installations and units of the
landing force are in operation. It includes securing
the final objective, and establishing the supply opera
tions necessary to consolidate the objective. During
this phase, reserve troops and bulk supplies are
brought in and established ashore. An adequate
beach support area is gained and consolidated, and
logistical installations are developed by progressive
stages. Usually, by D plus 60 the permanent logisti
cal organization has assumed full responsibility, and
11
all the amphibious support brigade shore party units
have been relieved. The sequence of the final phase
is generally as follows:
(1) When the assault battalions have reached
their designated phase lines in the objective
area, and the beach support areas are se
cured, battalion beachheads are consolidated
under EOT control.
(2) Battalion beachheads are next expanded to
seize regimental objectives. Regimental
reserves are landed and shore installations
are further consolidated.
(3) Regimental beachheads are expanded, divi-
; sion reserves are landed, and division objec
tives are seized.
(4) Command of the landing force is turned
over to the Army commander by the com
mander of the amphibious task force.
(Overall command of the forces engaged
in an amphibious operation is exercised by
the senior Navy commander until the initial
assault is secure. Usually, the turnover is
made by agreement between the senior Army
and Navy commanders, and is accomplished
by D plus 1 or D plus 2.)
(5) Landing craft of the amphibious support
brigade are returned to shore party control.
(Upon arrival at the far shore, all landing
craft are under Naval command during the
unloading of the assault shipping. They
are usually released to the shore party when
all of the APA's and most of the AKA's
have been unloaded, and in any event, when
the Navy control vessels leave the area.)
12
 (6) Shore installations are consolidated by the
commander of the division shore party as
more supplies and equipment are landed.
(7) If continuing land offensives follow, port
and base development begins. Additional
reinforcements arrive, base installations and
airfields are established, and the land of
fensive goes beyond the range of naval guns.
Air support continues, initially by long-
range and carrier-based aircraft, and later
by planes operating from fields prepared in
the objective area.
8. Components of an Amphibious Task Force
a. An amphibious task force consists of landing
forces, assault shipping, supporting naval units, and
tactical air units, all under a single commander.
Z>. A landing force is a task organization of troops
especially organized, trained, and equipped to carry
out amphibious operations. The size and composi
tion of a landing force varies with each operation,
from a single battalion landing team to a corps.
c. The reinforced infantry division is the basic
self-contained Army unit within the landing force.
It includes elements of all the arms and services re
quired in an amphibious operation. The reinforced
infantry division is organized for an amphibious
operation into regimental combat teams, task group
ings of supporting arms, and a reserve task grouping.
Attachments to the division for an amphibious op
eration may include—
(1) A shore party with its usual attachments.
(2) Amphibious tanks and tractors.

13
 (3) Amphibious truck (DUKW) or other am
phibious vehicle elements.
d. A regimental combat team (HOT) normally
consists of a regiment of infantry, a battalion of
artillery, a company of engineers, a battery of anti
aircraft artillery, and other divisional troops. When
organized for an amphibious operation, the ROT
contains only those elements of the basic infantry
regiment and attached units needed to initiate opera
tions ashore. This usually includes the battalion
landing teams (BLT), RCT reserve, and elements of
such units as shore party and engineers. The com
position of a typical EOT in amphibious operations
is shown in FM 60-10.
e. The battalion landing team (BLT) is the basic
task organization for an amphibious attack. It con
sists of an infantry battalion reinforced by attached
supporting and service units. Typical BLT organ
ization is described in FM 60-5.
9. Shore Party
a. The shore party is a task organization formed
for the purpose of providing combat and logistical
support within the beach support area to landing
force units during the early phases of an amphibious
operation. It frees assault troops from logistical
problems, so that they may devote all their energies
to combating the enemy. A shore party is organized
for each beach used in the assault.
5. The amphibious support brigade is the Army
shore party unit. Reinforced with combat and serv
ice units, it provides the shore party needed for a
corps landing. A reinforced amphibious support
regiment may be the shore party for an infantry di-
14
vision. A shore party for early support of a regi
mental combat team may consist of a reinforced
engineer shore company. A reinforced shore platoon
may provide initial shore party support for a bat
talion landing team (figs. 28 to 31).
c. Shore party support begins when the shore
party is first formed. This support on the near
shore may consist of assistance in training, planning,
and embarkation. On the far shore, elements of the
shore party—
(1) Mark the limits of the beaches.
(2) Establish and mark unloading points on the
beaches.
(3) Establish and operate beach dumps.
(4) Assist troop units in landing and moving
across the beaches.
(5) Eemove obstacles, and remove or mark mine
fields in the beach support area.
(6) Construct and maintain lateral and beach
exit roads.
(7) Maintain an information center to assist the
landing units.
(8) Control traffic in the beach support area.
(9) Maintain communication with troop com
manders and tactical-logistical groups afloat,
for control purposes.
(10) Maintain communication and liaison with
senior troop commanders ashore in zones
served by shore party echelons.
(11) Establish lateral communication between
beaches.
(12) Decontaminate or mark contaminated
parts of the beach support area.
(13) Maintain communications with ships.
15
 (14) Operate emergency motor maintenance
service to repair vehicles damaged in land
ing, and to assist units in dewaterproofing
equipment.
(15) Control the movement of amphibious ve
hicles loaded with supplies, unload supplies
from beached landing craft and landing
ships, and move them to the beach dumps.
Provide operational control of army light
erage, when present and when released from
naval operational control.
(16) Provide ships' platoons or hatch crews.
(17) Maintain a continuing record of units, ma
terial, and supplies, by appropriate cate
gories, that have been landed.
(18) Provide local security for the beach sup
port area, including an air-ground warning
system.
(19) Maintain a straggler collecting point.
(20) Evacuate casualties and prisoners of war.
d. The shore party provides logistical support to
the combat units until a base service unit, such as a
port organization or a logistical command, can be
established. Service units attached to the shore
party usually come from the organization that will
succeed the amphibious support brigade on the beach
head, thus assuring continuity in operations. The
turnover takes place gradually, the shore party trans
ferring its responsibilities and attached service troops
as the situation permits. When the transfer is com
pleted, the shore engineer units are released for fur
ther combat support operations, or given construction
responsibilities in the area.

16
10. Naval Beach Group
a. The Naval Beach Groups are permanent naval
organizations commanded by a naval officer with a
staff comparable in size to that of an army regimental
commander. Subordinate but separately commis
sioned units are the beachmaster unit, the boat unit,
and an amphibious construction battalion.
&. When an amphibious task force is organized, the
Navy assigns some or all of the beach group to the
task force. Personnel and equipment from the
beachmaster unit, reinforced, as the landing beach
situation dictates, by personnel and equipment from
the boat unit and the amphibious construction bat
talion, form the naval component of the shore party.
If hydrographic reconnaissance and underwater ob
stacle clearance are required, personnel and equip
ment from the underwater demolitions teams may
also be attached.
c. The decision for the organization of the naval
components of the shore party is usually made during
the planning phase of an operation and is contained
in the pertinent operation order for the landing.
d. The elements of a Naval Beach Group form task
organizations called beach parties, groups, and teams.
They are comprised of command, communications to
include visual, public announcing and radio, hydro-
graphic, salvage, boat repair, construction, traffic
control, and medical sections.
e. Naval components of a shore party perform the
following functions:
(1) Provide navigational aids and mark hazards
to navigation in the vicinity of the beaches.

305640—54
 (2) Determine the beaching points most suit
able for landing craft, landing ships, and
ponton causeways, from the viewpoint of
hydrographic and beaching conditions.
(3) Direct landing and retraction of landing
ships, small boats, and ponton causeways.
(4) Effect salvage and emergency repairs to
landing craft.
(5) Remove underwater obstructions in the
vicinity of the beach.
(6) Assist in the local security of the beach
support area.
(7) Establish lateral communication between
adjacent beach parties and maintain com
munication with naval commanders and
naval control units afloat.
(8) Assist in casualty evacuation.
(9) Improve beach approaches from seaward.
/. The amphibious construction battalion contains
a headquarters, a construction company, equipment
company, and ponton company. It provides ponton
causeways, warping tugs, ponton barge lighterage,
and beach salvage sections. The battalion also assists
in eliminating shoreline obstacles and constructing
landing slots, and in the general improvement of
the beaches.
g. For details, see Naval Warfare Information
Publication 22-5 (1953).
Tl. Air Force Shore Party Support
When the establishment of an Air Force base is
included in the landing force mission, an Air Force
shore party is attached to the landing force.

18
Usually it arrives on the beach after the assault phase
is completed, and the proposed airfield area has been
secured. This group performs the following duties:
(1) Provides technical assistance to the shore
party commander.
(2) Assists the shore party commander in the
location of air material dump sites.
(3) Locates, identifies, and supervises the seg
regation, by classes of supply, of air mate
rial crossing the beach.
(4) Supervises the operation of air material
beach dumps to include the identification
and segregation of such supplies. Main
tains records of air material handled
through beach dumps.
(5) Coordinates transportation of supplies
from the dumps to the airfield complex.

19
 CHAPTER 3
AMPHIBIOUS SUPPORT BRIGADE

12. Mission
The primary mission of the amphibious support
brigade is to provide logistical support to army forces
in amphibious operations until relieved by a more
permanent type of logistical organization. To ac
complish this mission, it establishes, operates, and
defends beach support areas and provides overwater
mobility. It must work closely with the Navy and is
normally attached to appropriate elements of the
landing force.
13. Capabilities
a. The amphibious support brigade provides, when
reinforced by attached units, combat and logistical
support of one corps in a joint amphibious operation.
&. When reinforced with attached units, it pro
vides and operates landing craft and cargo-handling
equipment for the overwater movement, and combat
and logistical support, of one reinforced infantry
division in shore-to-shore operations.
14. Organization
The amphibious support brigade consists of a bri
gade headquarters and headquarters company, three
amphibious support regiments, a transportation boat
maintenance battalion, a signal company, an ordnance
maintenance company, a quartermaster company, an
engineer field maintenance company, and a transpor
tation harbor craft company (fig. 1). The organiza-
20
 Amph Spt
Brig

1 , 1 1 1
Hq & Hq Engr Fid Trans
Co Maint Co Harcft Co Sig Co

1 1 i 1
Trans
Bt Maint Ord Maint OM Co
Co Med Det
Bn

If Amph
Spt Regt

Figure 1. Organization, amphibious support brigade.

tion and functions of the brigade and its components
are detailed in FM 60-25.
15. Augmentation
The amphibious support brigade is an organization
of specialists trained to perform definite tasks in
amphibious operations. Additional units must be
attached to meet the requirements of a particular
operation. These units consist of combat elements
from the landing force and service troops from the
theater. The combat units revert to landing force
control in two or three days after the landing, and
continue inland. The service troops remain in place,
passing to the control of each successive service head
quarters as it is established on the beachhead. Each
technical service and branch that has a supply mis
sion must furnish the operating nucleus for their
beach operations from the beginning of the opera
tion. This insures continuity of command and oper
ations, starting with the planning and preembarka-
tion activities.
16. Amphibious Support Regiment
a. Mission. The amphibious support regiment sup
ports, until relieved by base units, Army forces in
joint amphibious operations by establishing, defend
ing, and operating beach support areas, and provides
tactical mobility, combat, and logistical support for
shore-to-shore operations.
&. Capabilities. When reinforced with attached
units, the regiment can—
(1) Provide combat and logistical support for
one reinforced infantry division in a joint
amphibious operation.
22
 (2) Provide and operate landing craft and
cargo-handling equipment for overwater
movement, and combat and logistical sup
port for one regimental combat team in
shore-to-shore assault operations.
c. Organisation. The amphibious support regi
ment consists of a headquarters, headquarters and
service company, transportation boat battalion, and
engineer shore battalion (fig. 2).
d. Reinforcement. Depending upon the require
ments for a particular operation, the regiment is
normally reinforced by units from the amphibious
support brigade and from other organizations. A
division shore party may contain, in addition to the
amphibious support regiment, the following attach
ments :
1 engineer combat battalion.
1 Hq and Hq Det, transportation truck bat
talion.
3 transportation truck companies.
1 amphibious tractor battalion.
1 transportation amphibious truck company.
1 Hq, H&S company, transportation port
battalion.
3 transportation port companies, type A.
1 detachment, quartermaster hq and hq com
pany.
3 quartermaster service companies.
1 platoon, quartermaster subsistence supply
company.
1 platoon, quartermaster petroleum company.
1 company, military police battalion.

23
 Amph
Spt Regt

Hq, H&S Engr Trans

Co Med Det
Shore Bn Boat Bn

Figure 2. Organization, amphibious support regiment.

 1 prisoner-of-war guard detachment.
1 medical clearing company.
1 platoon, ambulance company.
1 chemical smoke generator company.
1 medical supply detachment.
1 ordnance ammunition supply detachment.
1 explosive ordnance disposal squad.
1 engineer supply team.
1 detachment, ordnance depot company.
1 signal supply detachment.
1 quartermaster salvage collecting team.
1 chemical supply team.
1 naval beach group.
1 detachment, signal company, amphibious sup
port brigade.
1 platoon, ordnance maintenance company, am
phibious support brigade.
1 company, transportation boat maintenance
battalion, amphibious support brigade.
e. Staff Functions. The regimental staff assists
the infantry division staff in planning amphibious
operations, in addition to performing its usual staff
functions for its subordinate units, whose activities
may include—
(1) Preparation and operation of embarkation
area.
(2) Allocation of craft for movement to the
far shore, according to the naval shipping
space available.
(3) In a shore-to-shore operation, allotment of
boat companies to embarkation groups;
planning and execution of the movement
of its boats, including embarking troops,

25
 transporting them to the objective area,
and landing them according to plan.
(4) Development and operation of a division
beach support area.
(5) Development of port, supply point, or base
facilities in accordance with the require
ments established by a higher headquarters.
(6) Conduct of port and supply point opera
tions until relieved, or until the landing
force is withdrawn.
/. Headquarters and Service Company. The reg
imental H&S company provides the usual adminis
trative services for the regiment. In addition, it
furnishes communication for the regiment and
attached units in the beach support area. The com
pany furnishes organizational maintenance for its
own vehicles and those of the transportation boat
battalion. Weapons and gun crews for the perimeter
defense of the beachhead are provided by the wea
pons platoon. The embarkation section controls,
coordinates, and records for the regimental com
mander, the activities of port, motor, labor, and
cargo control groups during embarkation and
debarkation.
g. Medical Detachment. The medical detach
ment consists of a headquarters section, a transpor
tation boat battalion section, and an engineer shore
battalion section. It performs the usual medical
services for the regiment, and is especially trained
in amphibious evacuation procedures. The med
ical detachment consolidates all medical units of the
shore party to accomplish medical missions within
the beach area.

26
17. Transportation Boat Battalion
a. The transportation boat battalion consists of a
headquarters and headquarters company, and three
lettered transportation boat companies. It provides
and operates landing craft for moving supplies and
troops from ships to the beach in support of one
reinforced infantry division in a joint amphibious
•operation; for resupply; and, when reinforced by
Navy craft, for transporting one EOT in a shore-to-
shore operation. It is equipped with LCM's (6) or
(8), passenger, cargo, and patrol boats. Navy craft
are usually attached to the battalion to supplement
organic boats in cargo-discharge or shore-to-shore
operations.
&. In addition to its normal duties, the staff plans
the details of all Army boat movements executed
under Army command. It assists the regimental
staff in planning with the Navy the details of as
signment, employment, and release of Army craft
operating under Navy control.
18. Engineer Shore Battalion
The organization and operations of the engineer
shore battalion are discussed in detail in the re
mainder of this manual.

27
 PART TWO
ORGANIZATION AND OPERATIONS
CHAPTER 4
ORGANIZATION

Section I. GENERAL

19. Mission
The mission of the engineer shore battalion is to
perform engineer shore party functions in support
of Army forces in a joint amphibious operation in
shore-to-shore operations, and to provide combat
support, with attached units, in the beach support
area. It may fight as infantry when required.
20. Capabilities
The engineer shore battalion is capable of—
a. Performing, when reinforced with attached
units, shore party work during a joint amphibious
operation in support of one infantry division (re
inforced) .
&. Performing shore party work during a shore-
to-shore assault operation in support of one regi
mental combat team.
c. Combat, with attached units, in defense of the
beach support area.
21. Organization
The engineer shore battalion consists of a head
quarters, headquarters and service company, and
three lettered shore companies (fig. 3). Details of
29
u
o

Engr
Shore
Bn

Hq H&S
Co
Engr
Shore
Co
Figure 3. Organisation, engineer shore battalion.
organization and equipment are contained in T/O
& E?s 5-525A, 5-526A, and 5-527A.
22. Reinforcement
Depending upon the needs of a particular opera
tion, the engineer shore battalion is reinforced by
the attachment of additional quartermaster, trans
portation, equipment and other units and detach
ments from the amphibious support brigade. Teams
from the engineer service organization may also be
attached.
23. Battalion Headquarters
a. The battalion headquarters provides planning,
direction, supervision, maintenance, and clerical serv
ice for the companies and attached units. It plans
the details of the beach support area, including all
the far shore installations, the defense of the area,
and traffic control.
&. The headquarters consists of the following staff
sections: Administrative and supply, operations,
communication, equipment, and maintenance (fig. 4).
Enlisted personnel and the equipment required for
operation of the staff sections are provided by the
headquarters and service company. Staff officers
belong to the battalion headquarters section of H&S
company. Personnel comprising the sections are as
follows:
(1) Administrative and supply section. Sup
ply officer (S4; also fire marshal), ad
jutant (Si), sergeant major, supply ser
geant, engineer supply sergeant, clerk
typists, light-truck drivers, company fire
chief, assistant company fire chief, fire
31
 fighters, senior water supply specialists,
water supply specialists, and water supply
helpers.
(2) Operations section. Operations officer (S3;
also intelligence officer-S2) construction
warrant officer, operations sergeant, clerk
typist, draftsman, light-truck driver, and
survey team, which includes a construction
surveyor, a recorder, a rodman-tapeman,
and a helper.
(3) Communication section. Communication
officer, communication chief, wire team
chief, radio operators, switchboard opera
tors, radio mechanic, wiremen, signal mes
sage clerks, signalmen, and motor mes
sengers.
(4) Equipment section. Maintenance officer,
assistant maintenance officer (a warrant
officer), construction machinery foreman;
crane-shovel, grader, and air-compressor
operators, and a heavy-truck driver.
(5) Maintenance section.' Maintenance officer
(also heads equipment section), engineer
equipment maintenance supervisor, motor
maintenance sergeant; engineer equipment
and wheel vehicle mechanics and helpers;
engineer parts specialist, welders, black
smith, machinists, and light-truck drivers.
24. Medical Detachment
A section provided from the medical detachment
of the amphibious support regiment provides medi
cal service for the battalion. It includes a medical

32
 Engr
Shore
Bn Hq
*

1 , 1 1 1
Opn Comm Equip Maint
See Sec Sec Sec

r_L - 1 ' 1
i Med I Admin &
j_ Det ! Sup Sec

1
1 1
FFT6 WS

u Figure 4. Organization, battalion headquarters.

w
officer, medical assistant, detachment and assistant
detachment sergeants, aidmen, station attendants,
and litter bearers.
25. Equipment
a. Organic battalion equipment includes air
compressors, crane-shovels, graders, bulldozers, an-
gledozers, fire-fighting equipment, welding sets,
motorized shop equipment, and water purification
equipment. Although the battalion has a wide
variety of both standard and special equipment, the
equipment needs of each operation will vary. Ad
ditional equipment is provided by the attachment of
engineer light equipment companies or teams from
the engineer service organization, and by the issue of
Class IV items from higher headquarters stocks.
The battalion can operate and maintain a limited
amount of Class IV equipment. Class IV items
often required include cranes, tractor dozers, fork
lift trucks, prefabricated road materials, cargo-
handling gear, signal equipment, roller conveyors,
and sandbags. Organic equipment allotted to the
battalion is detailed in T/O & E-525A. The com
ponent parts of sets are listed in the appropriate
engineer supply manuals.
&. Supplemental heavy equipment, with operators,
is provided to the shore companies by the equipment
section of battalion headquarters. Based upon re
quests approved-by the operations officer, the equip
ment officer allocates specific items to the companies
and advises the company commanders as to the most
effective use of the equipment. The using company
has control of the equipment and is responsible for

34
the proper performance of operator maintenance.
The equipment section remains responsible for or
ganizational maintenance, except when the using
company is detached and operates independently.
In that case, the using company assumes responsi
bility for organizational maintenance. If an appre
ciable amount of equipment is attached, mechanics
from the equipment section are also attached.
c. Sufficient operators are provided to permit two-
shift operation of each item of equipment.
d. Equipment and operators attached to the bat
talion for operations are placed under the control of
the equipment section.
26. Armament
The battalion is armed with individual weapons
(rifles, carbines, pistols, submachine guns, and gren
ade launchers). These weapons are suitable for the
protection of the battalion beach area and bivouac,
and for limited defense against low-flying aircraft.
The battalion is also supplied with crew-served wea
pons, which are assigned to the company headquar
ters, for use by weapon squads when the battalion
reorganizes for combat. These weapons include .30
and .50 caliber machine guns, rocket launchers, and
75-mm rifles.
27. Transportation
Battalion vehicles include utility, cargo, and dump
trucks. There are also special purpose vehicles in
cluding amphibious trucks, wreckers, tractor trucks,
cargo trailers, and water trailers.

35
Section II. HEADQUARTERS AND SERVICE COMPANY

28. Mission
Headquarters and service company provides com
mand and staff, communication, organizational main
tenance, engineer supply, and supplemental heavy
equipment for the engineer shore battalion. It also
operates water points in the beach support area.
29. Organization
a. The company .consists of a company headquar
ters and the enlisted men who work in the various
staff sections of battalion headquarters. These men
perform their duties under the control of the staff
officers in charge of their assigned sections.
b. The shore battalion element of the medical de
tachment from the amphibious support regiment is
usually attached to H & S company for rations, quar
ters, administration, and some operational training.
30. Company Headquarters
The company headquarters provides command,
supervision, and administration for company per
sonnel. It is organized into a command echelon and
an administrative echelon.
31. Command Echelon
The command echelon consists of the company
commander, executive officer, first sergeant, light-
truck driver, and orderlies.
32. Company Commander
a. The company commander is responsible for the
operations, training, administration, and discipline
36
of his company. In meeting these responsibilities,
he—
(1) Trains his company to insure its readiness
to accomplish the company mission. Spe
cialized training of personnel assigned to
staff sections is conducted by the staff officers
of each section.
(2) Supervises and inspects his command to
insure compliance with directives issued by
higher headquarters.
(3) Leads his company in combat, and is re
sponsible for the local security of company
headquarters.
6. The commander of H & S company also serves
as headquarters commandant. In this capacity, he—
(1) Provides for the local security of battalion
headquarters.
(2) Supervises the movement of battalion head
quarters, furnishing the necessary men and
transportation from the company.
(3) Supervises the headquarters mess, and the
messing and quartering of casuals.
(4) Acts as headquarters billeting officer, in co
ordination with SI.
(5) Enforces traffic control regulations within
the battalion headquarters and H & S com
pany areas.
(6) Marks routes, and supervises guides and
advance details for battalion motor marches.
33. Executive Officer
As second in command, the executive officer is the
principal assistant and adviser to the company com-

37
mander. He supervises the administrative, mess,
and supply sections, and aids the company com
mander in the general supervision of the company.
34. First Sergeant
a. The first sergeant is the principal enlisted assist
ant to the company commander in the administration
and control of the company. In the absence of all
officers, he assumes temporary command of the
company.
&. The first sergeant is selected by the company
commander from the master sergeants assigned to the
company. He carries the MOS of combat con
struction foreman. He coordinates company mess,
supply, transportation, communication, and main
tenance; prepares and maintains records, rosters,
reports, and correspondence; and exercises limited
control over the enlisted men. In operations, the
first sergeant is particularly concerned with insuring
that high standards of discipline and housekeeping
are maintained in spite of difficult working condi
tions. The comfort and morale of the company are
his particular concern.
35. Other Personnel
The light-truck driver is responsible for the proper
maintenance and operation of his vehicle. He may
also operate a radio. Orderlies act as messengers,
and perform personal services for company officers.
Two additional men may be designated from com
pany personnel, to serve as orderlies in addition to
their regularly assigned duties.

38
36. Administrative Echelon
The administrative echelon consists of the admin
istrative section, mess section, and supply section.
37. Administrative Section
a. The administrative section consists of the unit
administrator and the company administrative clerk.
b. The unit administrator, a warrant officer, is a
specialist in company administration. He assists the
company commander in supervising company admin
istration, mess, and supply. The clerk assists him
with company administrative details.
38. Mess Section
a. In addition to the usual messing functions, the
mess section also provides a mess for the officers of
battalion headquarters and for casuals. The section
consists of a mess steward, cooks, and cooks helpers.
b. The mess steward supervises the activities of the
section to insure that the company is served the best
and most palatable food possible. He prepares
menus, inspects incoming supplies, maintains strict
sanitary conditions in the kitchen area, and is re
sponsible for the care and security of all property in
his section. The cooks prepare food under his direc
tion, and maintain the kitchen equipment.
39. Supply Section
a. The supply section consists of the supply ser
geant, armorer, electrician, signpainter, and utilities
repairman.
6. The supply sergeant procures clothing, equip
ment, and supplies from the battalion S4, with the

39
 exception of rations, fuel, and vehicle repair parts.
He issues supplies to company personnel, receives
turned-in equipment for replacement and repair, and
keeps accurate records of all transactions. The sup
ply sergeant is responsible for the care and security
of all property in his section.
c. The armorer performs organizational mainte
nance on company weapons, and assists the supply
sergeant. The duties of the electrician, signpainter,
and utilities repairman are indicated by their job
titles.
d. Headquarters and service company does not
provide battalion-level supply and maintenance;
these services are performed by the appropriate
sections of battalion headquarters.
40. Equipment
In addition to the usual housekeeping equipment,
headquarters and service company has an air com
pressor, tractor crane-shovels and attachments, fire-
fighting equipment, motorized graders, a towed
grader, pneumatic or steam hammer, scarifiers, flood
lighting equipment, motorized repair shop, portable
water purification sets, welding sets, a semitrailer,
utility and cargo trucks, a medium wrecker, and a
tractor truck. The company has shop facilities for
the maintenance of vehicles and equipment, and can
operate a pool of heavy construction equipment, with
operators, for allocation to the shore companies.
41. Armament
The company is armed with pistols, carbines, rifles,
.50 cal. machine guns, submachine guns, and grenade
and rocket launchers.
40
42. Communications
For communication, the company has telephones
and switchboards; panel sets; and AN/PKC-9,
AN/PRC-10, and AN/VRC-9 radios.

Section III. ENGINEER SHORE COMPANY

43. Mission
The mission of the engineer shore company is to
perform engineer shore party functions in amphibi
ous operations, and to provide combat support by
defense of the beach support area. It may fight as
infantry when required.
44. Capabilities
a. The engineer shore company is capable of—
(1) Performing, when reinforced with attached
units, shore party work during a joint am
phibious ship-to-shore operation in support
of one regimental combat team.
(2) Performing shore party work during a
shore-to-shore operation in support of one
battalion combat team.
(3) Performing general engineer work in the
improvement and expansion of the beach
support area.
(4) Combat, with attached tmits, in the beach
support area.
b. The engineer shore company is the core of the
beach operational structure. Personnel from the
company mark the beach limits and unloading points,
prepare landing slots, construct roads and beach in
stallations, direct beach unloading, man the ground

41
defenses, provide beach communication facilities, and
do general engineering work in the beach support
area.
45. Organization
The engineer shore company is composed of a
company headquarters, an equipment-repair platoon,
a communication section, and two shore platoons.
Each shore platoon has a headquarters and three
shore sections (fig. 5).
46. Company Headquarters
a. The company headquarters provides command
and administration for the shore platoons. It con
tains a command echelon and an administrative
echelon. In the command echelon are the company
commander, executive officer, first sergeant, and
light-truck driver. The administrative echelon con
tains the unit administrator, personnel management
clerk, mess, and supply sections. Except for the
supply section, the duties of company headquarters
personnel are similar to those of their counterparts
in the H&S company (pars. 28 through 42).
&. The shore company supply section consists of
a supply sergeant, armorer, engineer supply special
ist, signpainter, and toolroom keeper. The engineer
supply specialist, directed by the supply sergeant,
handles the procurement and issuance of engineer
supplies and equipment. The toolroom keeper is re
sponsible for the maintenance and issue of company
tools. Other personnel perform duties similar to
those with the same job titles and the H&S company.

42
 Engr
Shore
Co

1 1 1 1
1
Co Comm Equip
Hq Sec Shore Rep Plat
1 Plat

1
1
Plat
Hq
Shore
Sec

Figure 5. Organization, engineer shore company.

47. Equipment-Repair Platoon
a. The equipment-repair platoon consists of an
equipment-repair officer (platoon leader), construc
tion machinery foreman (assistant platoon leader),
motor sergeant, amphibious and wheeled-vehicle
mechanics, crane-shovel and tractor operators, weld
ers, engineer equipment mechanics, and truck drivers
for light, heavy, and amphibious vehicles.
&. The platoon provides a pool of equipment, with
operators, for the use of the engineer shore company.
In addition, it performs inspection, maintenance,
and repair for company construction equipment and
vehicles. Repair parts and additional repair sup
port are obtained when necessary from the battalion
maintenance section. Equipment from the platoon
may be allocated by the company commander to the
shore platoons for specific projects, or the platoon
may be detached from the company to serve else
where in the battalion.
c. Platoon equipment includes crawler-type trac
tors, including some with armored cabs for beach
operations; crane-shovel units, wdth trailers for at
tachments; a road scraper; portable floodlighting
equipment, welding equipment, mechanics tool sets,
a tractor truck, semitrailers for transporting trac
tors, a utility truck, a cargo truck with trailer, and
amphibious trucks.
48. Communication Section
a. The communication section consists of a com
munication chief, signal message clerks, radio opera
tors, wiremen, and signalmen.
1). The section is responsible for all company com
munication activities, and for the maintenance of
44
all signal equipment in the company. It establishes
and maintains communication with the engineer
shore battalion, and with attached units, the pla
toons, supported and adjacent units. The section
works directly with signal personnel of the naval
beach group in communications to seaward.
c. The section supervises the technical training of
company communication personnel, and operates the
company communications center.
d. Section equipment includes panel sets, radio
sets, signal lamps, telephones, wire and wire equip
ment, and equipment tools.
49. Shore Platoon
a. The shore platoon consists of a headquarters
and three sections. The headquarters includes the
platoon leader, platoon sergeant, air-compressor op
erators (one is a vehicle driver), truck drivers, and
radio operators. The platoon leader is responsible
for the administration and discipline of his platoon.
He plans, coordinates, and supervises all platoon
activities. He is assisted by the platoon sergeant in
job organization, work procedures, and the general
supervision of platoon operations.
&. The platoon is the main operational component
of the company, but does not provide its own ad
ministration and supply. When reinforced, the pla
toon normally furnishes direct shore party support
for a battalion landing team in an amphibious op
eration. It is the basic control unit when the shore
company is operating in support of a large-scale
operation. The platoon is best employed intact, un
der control of the platoon leader.

45
 c. Pioneer and construction sets assigned to the
platoon are maintained by platoon headquarters and
issued to the section as required.
50. Shore Section
a. The shore section consists of the section leader
(combat construction foreman), assistant section
leader (combat construction specialist), combat con
struction specialists, combat demolition men, dump
truck drivers, and pioneers.
b. The engineer shore section is the basic work unit
of the battalion. It can operate independently of
the platoon for only short periods of time, and is
rarely so employed.
51. Company Equipment
Shore company equipment includes pioneer equip
ment sets, armored-cab tractors, truck-mounted air
compressors, crane-shovels, pneumatic drills, port
able construction floodlighting equipment, pneumatic
grinders, sump pumps, towed scraper, semitrailer,
sign-painting equipment, pneumatic paint sprayer,
crawler tractors with bulldozer attachments, weld
ing sets, a demolition set, cargo trailers, utility
trucks, water trailer, DUKWs, cargo trucks, dump
trucks and a truck tractor.
52. Armament
The shore company is armed with carbines, rifles,
.50 cal. machine guns, .30 cal. machine guns, sub
machine guns, grenade and rocket launchers.

46
 CHAPTER 5

COMMAND AND STAFF RESPONSIBILITIES

Section I. BATTALION COMMANDER

53. General
a. The battalion commander, assisted by his staff
and the company commanders, leads and adminis
ters the battalion in accordance with the principles
set forth in AR 220-60. The commander of the en
gineer shore battalion must have a thorough knowl
edge of amphibious operations. He must understand
the employment, capabilities, and limitations of the
units and equipment under his control, including
those of other arms and services with which he will
be associated in operations.
Z>. The battalion commander and his staff func
tion under the direction of the commander of the
amphibious support regiment. They must maintain
the closest contact with their counterparts in the
regimental headquarters, and in the headquarters of
the transportation boat battalion.
54. Conduct of Operations
a. When the engineer shore battalion is in sup
port of another unit, the battalion commander keeps
the unit headquarters informed of his situation and
the support he can give. He insures that the sup
ported unit commander fully understands the capa
bilities, limitations, and most effective employment
of the engineer shore battalion. The battalion com
mander establishes adequate communication and li-
47
 aison with the supported unit, and keeps it informed
of the situation and plans of the battalion, and the
location of battalion installations.
&. The battalion commander goes wherever he can
best direct and control the operations of the bat
talion. He has total responsibility for the entire
shore party area, and must avoid becoming too in
volved in a specific beach problem, to the neglect of
other shore party activities.
c. In beach operations, the commander of the en
gineer shore battalion takes orders only from the com
mander of the amphibious support regiment, unless
the battalion is attached separately to a supported
unit.
55. Standard Operating Procedure (SOP)
a. The policies of the battalion commander are
embodied in a standing operating procedure (SOP)
which states the procedures to be followed in rou
tine situations. The SOP is an order; deviations
from it may not be made without approval of the
battalion commander.
b. The battalion executive officer coordinates the
preparation of the SOP. There is no prescribed
form, but the arrangement should permit easy revi
sion. The battalion SOP may consist of two parts,
one covering the activities of the staff sections, and
the other devoted to the general operations of the
battalion. The size and content of the SOP will
vary with the completeness of the SOP of the am
phibious support regiment, and the desires of the
battalion commander. A suggested form for a shore
party standing operating procedure is presented in
appendix IV.
48
56. Supply Economy
Supply economy is a command responsibility.
The battalion commander insures that supply econ
omy is practiced at all times, and that everyone in
the battalion is aware of its importance. Supply
economy is secured by the proper maintenance of
equipment, the most efficient use of labor and trans
portation, and careful planning. It is particularly
important that all battalion personnel are indoctri
nated with the need for taking precautions against
pilfering in dumps and during unloading operations.
Frequent inspections are made by the battalion com
mander and his staff officers to insure that supply
economy is rigidly enforced throughout the battalion.

Section II. BATTALION STAFF

57. Organization
a. The battalion commander is assisted by a unit
staff and a special staff. Comprising the unit staff
are the executive officer, adjutant (SI), operations
officer (S3) (also acts as intelligence officer (S2)),
and the supply officer (S4). The special staff is
made up of specialists in the employment of organic
or attached units, and includes the maintenance offi
cer, communications officer, and construction officer.-
Staff procedure and employment follow the princi
ples stated in FM's 5-6 and 101-5.
b. During an amphibious operation, the unit staff
is organized to function continuously on a 24-hour
basis. Two shifts may be formed, with the execu
tive officer supervising the night shift.

305640—54———4 49
58. Executive Officer
The executive officer is the principal assistant and
adviser to the battalion commander. By coordinat
ing and supervising the many details of operations
and administration, he enables the battalion com
mander to devote a greater amount of time to more
important command functions. The executive offi
cer is prepared to assume command at any time,
should the battalion commander become a casualty.

Section III. ADMINISTRATION

59. Adjutant (SI)

a. The adjutant is responsible to the battalion com
mander for all personnel and administrative actions
in the battalion. He is assisted by the sergeant ma
jor and the administrative personnel of the admin
istrative and supply section.
&. As routine duties, the adjutant—
(1) Maintains the unit journal and other rec
ords not assigned specifically to other staff
sections.
(2) Processes official correspondence.
(3) Prepares strength records and reports.
(4) Supervises the evacuation of prisoners in
the initial stages of an amphibious opera
tion, and maintains PW records.
(5) Supervises graves registration if no graves
registration unit is present with the shore
party; arranges for the collection and tem
porary disposition of the dead if they ham
per beach operations.

50
 (6) Directs morale activities. This includes
handling such matters as recreation, dec
orations, leaves and passes. He supervises
the mail clerks and arranges for mail dis
tribution and collection.
(7) Makes administrative recommendations con
cerning transfers, assignments, reassign-
ments, promotions, demotions, classification
and reclassification of personnel.
(8) Allocates space and area for bivouacs, in
coordination with S3 and S4, and assisted
by the headquarters commandant.
(9) Secures and administers native labor.
(10) Prepares data for the unit report.
(11) Prepares estimates and plans covering
personnel activities for current and future
operations.
(12) Prepares the personnel portion of the op
eration order.

Section IV. OPERATIONS AND INTELLIGENCE

60. Operations
a. Battalion plans for an amphibious operation
are prepared by the operations officer, in coordina
tion with the other staff sections, and under the su
pervision of the executive officer. His responsibili
ties in the initial stages of planning include—
(1) Recommending the assignment and attach
ment of units to insure a shore party organ
ization that will meet the requirements of
the operation.
(2) Recommending the number of personnel,
and the amounts and types of equipment,
51
 needed to accomplish the assigned beach
support tasks. He coordinates these recom
mendations with SI and S4.
(3) Preparing a suggested layout of the bat
talion beach support area, including the
locations of assembly areas, command posts,
traffic control points, bivouac areas, the de
fense perimeter and other installations.
(4) Supervising preparation of the communica
tion plan, in coordination with the com
munication officer.
(5) Recommending the most effective employ
ment of battalion units and equipment in
unloading and construction operations on
the far shore.
(6) Preparing the battalion operation order,
based upon information provided by the
other staff sections. After the order is ap
proved, he authenticates, publishes, and dis
tributes it.
l>. During operations, S3 supervises the execution
of the operation order; provides information and
makes recommendations for the employment of the
battalion; controls liaison personnel; supervises the
defense of the beach support area; maintains the
situation map; and makes plans for the future
employment of the battalion.
61. Intelligence
a. The operations officer is also the battalion in
telligence officer (S2). Intelligence activities are con
ducted as prescribed in FM's 30-5 and 100-5. The
primary sources of intelligence for the engineer shore
battalion are the intelligence agencies of the amphib-
52
ious support regiment and of the landing force. All
battalion personnel are indoctrinated with the im
portance of reporting promptly any information of
possible intelligence value.
6. In his capacity as intelligence officer, S3 is re
sponsible for keeping the battalion informed of the
enemy situation and capabilities, and their possible
effect upon battalion operations. He collects and
distributes information about the terrain and
weather, directs reconnaissance activities, and super
vises counterintelligence measures. He is also re
sponsible for securing and distributing maps, aerial
photos, and other operational aids.

Section V. SUPPLY

62. Battalion Supply Officer

a. The battalion supply officer (S4) supervises and
directs the supply personnel of the battalion head
quarters. He keeps the battalion commander fully
informed of the supply status of the battalion, and
maintains accurate records of supplies on hand or
requisitioned.
&. The supply officer works in cooperation with S3,
to insure that battalion operations are fully sup
ported by adequate and timely supply. He also main
tains close relations with the other staff officers, the
shore company commanders, the S4 of the amphibious
support regiment, and all supporting supply instal
lations.
c. In performing his routine duties, the supply
officer—
(1) Procures, stores, and distributes all supplies
except medical supplies.
53
 (2) Kecommends the location of beach supply,
medical, and maintenance installations.
(3) Supervises evacuation, in coordination with
the SI, S3, and surgeon.
(4) Supervises equipment maintenance.
(5) Supervises the collection and disposition of
salvaged and captured materiel.
(6) Supervises traffic control, in coordination
with S3 and the military police, in the beach
support area.
(7) Supervises sanitary measures, in coordina
tion with the surgeon.
(8) Provides for the security of supply and
evacuation installations, in coordination
with S3.
(9) Prepares the administrative paragraph of
the operation order.
(10) Supervises supply records in all units of
the battalion.
(11) Maintains a file of weight and cubic meas
urements of vehicles, equipment, and supply
items for loading purposes.
(12) Plans, provides for, and supervises the
transportation of supplies; allocates non-
organic transportation used for supply and
administrative purposes.
(13) Conducts continuous training of supply
specialists, both in battalion headquarters
and in the supply sections of the companies.
63. Battalion Supply
All classes of supply, except medical supplies, are
procured, stored, and issued by the supply personnel
of battalion headquarters. Eepair parts for vehicles
54
and construction equipment are handled by the main
tenance section of the headquarters and service com
pany. Medical supply is a responsibility of the
surgeon.
64. Water Supply Specialists
The water supply specialists reconnoiter for suit
able water sources, and operate water points in the
beach support area.
65. Fire Fighting
As fire marshal, the battalion supply officer is
responsible for training and supervising the fire-
fighters. Under the direction of the company fire
chief, these men are trained and prepared to extin
guish fires, prevent fires from spreading, rescue
people, salvage property, enforce fire safety precau
tions, and maintain fire-fighting equipment. They
inspect buildings, operations, and facilities to insure
that proper safeguards against fire are maintained.
Organic equipment may also be used for emptying
swamped landing craft.

Section VI. MAINTENANCE

66. Battalion Maintenance Officer

a. The battalion maintenance officer is the prin
cipal adviser to the battalion commander, staff, and
company commanders concerning automotive equip
ment operation and maintenance.
b. The duties of the battalion maintenance officer
include—
(1) Supervision and coordination of equipment
operations and repair activities, including
55
 the maintenance and equipment sections of
headquarters and service company.
(2) Supervision of preventive maintenance, and
enforcement of safe operation practices.
(3) Insuring the timely and adequate supply of
repair parts.
(4) Conduct of inspections to determine the con
dition and state of vehicle and equipment
maintenance. (See TM 37-2810 and TM
5-505.)
(5) Inspection of shop operations to insure that
repair schedules are being followed.
(6) Supervision of on-the-job training for driv
ers, operators, and mechanics.
(7) Supervision of convoy movements.
(8) Supervision of loading and unloading ve
hicles and heavy equipment on transports,
landing ships, and landing craft.
(9) Analysis of maintenance requirements, in
cluding the dispatch and/or deadline of
vehicles and equipment, study of deadline
reports for repeated failures on critical
items, and on companies with poor mainte
nance records, and the remedial action to
be taken.
(10) Maintenance of appropriate records and
submission of required reports.
(11) Preparation of battalion directives con
cerning motor pool operations, the use and
maintenance of special purpose equipment,
and the operational control of the mainte
nance and equipment sections of headquar
ters and service company.

56
 (12) Coordination with the battalion operations
officer to determine maintenance priorities,
allotment of special purpose equipment, and
the adjustment of unit work loads.
(13) Conduct of driver and operator tests.
c. Normally each company of the battalion per
forms organizational maintenance in its own area.
This permits close, direct control of the equipment
by the personnel who maintain it. When the com
panies are operating under battalion control in the
beach support area, company maintenance personnel
may be placed in a battalion pool. While this per
mits a more efficient use of maintenance personnel
and greater specialization, it removes company per
sonnel from direct control by the company com
mander, especially for manor servicing and repair
jobs. To overcome this disadvantage, all mainte
nance personnel may be located in the same general
area, with each group remaining responsible for its
own equipment. This permits common use of equip
ment pool facilities, and the emergency employment
of company mechanics to assist in the repair of other
equipment.
67. Maintenance Section
a. The maintenance section is commanded by the
maintenance officer, assisted by the maintenance su
pervisor. It is trained and equipped to—
(1) Perform organizational maintenance for all
ordnance vehicles and engineer equipment
of battalion headquarters, and headquarters
and service company.

57
 (2) Perform organizational maintenance be
yond the capacity of the shore company
equipment-repair platoons.
(3) Perform field maintenance for battalion
vehicles and engineer equipment in the bat
talion shop or on job-sites.
(4) Requisition, store, and issue spare parts for
vehicles and equipment.
(5) Conduct preventive maintenance inspec
tions.
(6) Furnish technical advice on equipment and
maintenance problems and assistance to the
other elements of the battalion.
b. The maintenance section usually operates at a
central location in the beach support area. If equip
ment cannot be brought to the battalion shop for
repair, the section sends a team to the site,
68. Maintenance Supervisor
The maintenance supervisor, in addition to assist
ing the battalion maintenance officer, maintains the
technical administrative records, including master
job records, job orders production schedules, dead-
lined equipment reports, parts consumption reports,
lubrication records, and inspection reports. He also
maintains a library of technical manuals and similar
publications concerning automotive and engineer
equipment.
69. Maintenance Subsections
a. The automotive maintenance subsection consists
of the motor maintenance sergeant, chief wheel-
vehicle mechanic, wheel-vehicle mechanics and help
ers, and a light-truck driver. The motor maintenance
58
 sergeant is in charge of the subsection, assisted by
the chief wheel-vehicle mechanic. The section per
forms preventive maintenance inspections, and re
pairs all the automotive equipment of the battalion.
It provides wrecker service for the companies, and
may also operate a headquarters and service company
motor pool. The motor maintenance sergeant checks
the quality of workmanship and the prompt comple
tion of repairs. The chief wheel-vehicle mechanic
inspects and supervises repair work. He may also
serve as motor sergeant for headquarters and service
company. One of the wheel-vehicle mechanic help
ers usually serves as the dispatcher.
l>. The engineer equipment subsection is headed by
the engineer equipment maintenance supervisor, who
directs the repair and maintenance of engineer equip
ment. He is assisted by the senior engineer equip
ment mechanic. The section includes engineer
equipment mechanics and helpers, and a light-truck
driver. The section performs preventive mainte
nance inspections, and repairs equipment. It assists
the equipment-repair platoons of the shore compa
nies. Mechanics may be attached to shore companies
to perform emergency repairs on the beach during
the early phases of an amphibious operation. The
maintenance of heavy engineer equipment is a major
problem in amphibious operations, since it is subject
to continuous operation, and exposed to the corrosive
action of sea water.
c. The shop subsection includes welders and a ma
chinist. It is capable of repairing damaged parts
and of manufacturing parts that are not otherwise
obtainable. Specialists assigned to the subsection

59
receive special training in repairing vehicles and
equipment used in beach operations.
d. The engineer parts specialist secures, stocks,
and issues repair parts required for section mainte
nance operations.
70. Maintenance Principles
Maintenance activities in the engineer shore bat
talion are guided by the following principles—
a. Every piece of engineer equipment and every
vehicle should have an assigned driver or operator,
and an assistant, who perform daily and weekly
servicing under supervision.
&. Repairs are performed at the lowest echelon of
maintenance consistent with the nature of the repair,
authorized spare parts, tools, time available, skill of
personnel, and accessibility of the next higher main
tenance level.
c. Each echelon performs any of the overflow
maintenance functions of the lower echelons when
necessary.
d. When practicable, maintenance on heavy equip
ment should be performed at the job site.
e. Equipment parks and shop areas should be lo
cated near access roads. Hardstands and covered
shop areas increase work output.
/. Repair parts stock levels in all echelons are
closely supervised.
g. Adequate maintenance records must be main
tained for all vehicles and equipment.
h. An adequate maintenance library of technical
manuals and lubrication orders must be maintained
at each level for all items of organic equipment.

60
 i. Maintenance SOP's should be firmly enforced
throughout the battalion. These should include
SOP's covering salvage, dewaterproofing, vehicle
control, and similar beach operation activities.
j. Selection and assignment of maintenance per
sonnel should be on the basis of technical knowledge,
experience, ability, and the possibilities of further
development through training.
k. Company commanders are responsible for en
forcing the requirements of maintenance policies
and directives.
71. Equipment Section
a. The equipment section is supervised by the main
tenance officer, aided by the assistant maintenance
officer. In charge of the routine operations of the
section is the construction machinery foreman, who
controls the crane-shovel, grader, and air compressor
operators, and the heavy-truck driver.
J. The construction machinery foreman is respon
sible for insuring that—
(1) Equipment and operators arrive at desig
nated locations on schedule, in accordance
with the allocations approved by the bat
talion operations officer.
(2) Equipment status and administrative rec
ords are maintained.
(3) Personnel are assigned to all equipment to
insure maintenance when not in use.
(4) Administrative details, such as transporta
tion and meal schedules, and the servicing
of equipment, are arranged with the shore
companies to which equipment is allocated.

61
 (5) Accessory changes required on equipment
are made.
(6) Equipment is properly used.

Section VII. COMMUNICATIONS

72. Communications Officer

a. The communications officer serves as an adviser
to the battalion commander and staff on communica
tions technique and procedure. He supervises all
battalion communications, the operational mainte
nance of equipment, and the training of communica
tions personnel.
b. In the planning stage, the communications
officer prepares operating instructions for battalion
communications, and works closely with S3, so that
the communication requirements of the operation
plan will be met. He must insure that the battalion
commander and staff know exactly what communica
tion facilities will be provided, and when they will
become available, as well as the practical capabilities
and limitations of the equipment under the conditions
that will prevail.
73. Communications Section
The communications chief assists the communica
tions officer in controlling the operations of the mes
sage center, radio, and wire subsections.
a. The message center receives and dispatches all
communications for battalion headquarters. Mes
senger service is established as soon as possible after
a landing, to reduce the load on radio and tele
phone circuits. Detailed procedures for message
center operation are contained in FM 24^17.
62
 b. The radio subsection operates the battalion radio
net, providing radio communication by voice or code
with higher, lower, and adjacent headquarters.
Radio techniques are described in FM 24^18.
o. The wire subsection provides telephone service
for the battalion headquarters. It also installs and
maintains the wire net to the various company head
quarters. Telephone control operations and wire
technique are detailed in FM 24-20.
74. Communications Principles
Responsibility for communications in the battalion
is based upon the following principles:
a. Communication between the amphibious sup
port regiment and the battalion is established by the
regiment; between the battalion and companies, by
the battalion.
b. Communication between the engineer shore bat
talion, the boat battalion, and any other elements of
the amphibious support regiment, is established by
the regiment.
c. When in support of a unit, the battalion or its
elements establishes communication with the sup
ported unit; when attached to a unit, communication
is established by the unit to which attached.

Section VIII. MEDICAL

75. Medical Detachment

The medical detachment, attached from the am
phibious support regiment, furnishes normal medical
service to the battalion. It provides company aid-
men, operates the battalion aid station and dispen-

63
sary, and evacuates casualties. Dental care is pro
vided on an area basis by division or higher
commands.
76. Surgeon
Duties of the battalion surgeon include—
a. Making medical and sanitary inspections, and
keeping the battalion commander informed of the
medical situation.
&. Recommending sites for medical installations.
c. Caring for and supervising the treatment of
wounded.
d. Organizing the detachment so as to furnish med
ical service in operations.
e. Conducting amphibious medical training for all
medical personnel attached to the battalion.
/. Maintaining records and submitting reports.
g. Preparing medical and evacuation plans.
h. Advising the battalion commander regarding
the medical support requirements of operation plans.
i. Providing medical supply for the battalion.

64
 CHAPTER 6

PREPARATIONS FOR AMPHIBIOUS

OPERATION

Section I. GENERAL

77. General
a. An amphibious operation must be prepared as
far in advance of the landing date as possible. A
period of from three to six months would be desirable
to plan a major operation at the higher levels. A
corps headquarters requires from 90 to 100 days for
planning; a division, from 75 to 90 days. If each
headquarters prepared its plan separately, starting
only after the next higher headquarters had com
pleted planning, an amphibious operation would re
quire from 8 to 15 months to prepare. Accordingly,
all headquarters must prepare their plans concur
rently, in close cooperation with other headquarters.
The amphibious support brigade, amphibious support
regiment, and engineer shore battalion prepare plans
concurrently with those of the tactical units they
support.
1). Plans and preparations must be flexible. En
emy strength, dispositions, and actions may prove to
be different from what was expected, requiring sud
den and possibly radical changes when the landing is
made. Weather conditions are never completely pre
dictable, terrain information may be incomplete, and
similar variables may strongly influence actual op
erations. Plans must be flexible enough to meet any
unforeseen changes in the situation.
305640—54———5 65
 c. Plans and orders for an amphibious operation
must be more detailed than those prepared for normal
ground operations. The amphibious landing force
is composed of many types of units from all services.
Key members of each unit must know the plans of
the others with which it will be associated. Initially,
units are scattered, and control is highly decentral
ized. There must be the closest possible .cooperation
and understanding between key members of all ele
ments of the participating forces. As the headquar
ters level drops, the scope of a plan narrows, but the
need for detail increases. The amount of detail re
quired in general instructions depends upon the state
of training of the units concerned and the complete
ness of standing operating procedures.
d. All plans must be complete before embarkation,
and thoroughly understood by everyone taking part
in the operation. During the voyage to the landing
area, radio silence is observed, and the only means of
signal communication available are visual signalling
and messenger boats. It is difficult to effect major
changes in plans and orders.
e. Warning orders must be issued early, so that
planning agencies may start their work without delay.
/. Details of plans and orders required in amphib
ious operations are contained in FM 31-5.
78. Planning Directive
a. When the infantry division receives a directive
from higher headquarters for an amphibious opera
tion, the division staff prepares tentative plans which
are as detailed as time and the directive permit.
Based on these, it issues a planning directive to the
units comprising the landing force.
66
 b. The commander of the engineer shore battalion
receives a directive from the amphibious support
regiment stating the objective, troops participating,
composition of the shore party, mission of the bat
talion, and the dates by which scheduled prepara
tions must be completed. This will not be a complete
and final order, since planning by the regiment will
be proceeding concurrently with planning being done
by the landing force headquarters. It will contain,
however, the basic information required by the engi
neer shore battalion headquarters to initiate its own
planning activities.
c. Upon receipt of the directive, the battalion
commander assembles his staff and gives them the
information he has received, together with his own
instructions concerning the employment of the bat
talion in the operation. The staff officers then begin
to prepare those portions of battalion plans which
are the responsibility of their sections. A meeting
of company commanders is also held, to brief them
on the planning requirements. At these conferences,
a schedule is announced, setting dates by which each
phase of the preparations must be completed. Sched
ules are established by each unit, including the shore
companies, to insure that planning proceeds in an
orderly manner.
79. Activation of Shore Party

The landing force planning directive states the

organization of the shore party and attaches rein
forcing units and equipment to the amphibious sup
port regiment. Since the majority of these attached
units are concerned with shore party operations,

67
many of them are further attached to the engineer
shore battalion.
80. Planning Security
a. Every commander is responsible for enforcing
security regulations and maintaining counterintelli-
gence safeguards throughout the planning period.
All planning activities must be conducted in well-
guarded planning rooms. All documents and other
planning materials are kept in these rooms, which
may be entered only by persons directly concerned
with planning duties.
&. The designated code title for the operation must
be used at all times. Names and localities in the
objective area are never mentioned; mail is strictly
censored, and communications channels are moni
tored carefully. Commanders insure that all docu
ments pertaining to the operation are classified
properly.
81. Planning and Operational Aids
a. As soon as security considerations permit, the
battalion receives from the regiment the various aids
required for planning and operations. These may
include—
(1) Air photos: vertical, strip, low oblique (pref
erably 1: 3,000 at shoreline), high oblique,
and stereo pairs.
(2) Photo surface models: photographs printed
on a molded plastic relief model of the area
photographed. These serve all the purposes
of a conventional relief map, and can be dis
tributed more conveniently.

68
 (3) Relief maps: preferably gridded, approxi
mately 1: 5,000 with at least a 2 to 1 exag
geration in vertical relief, and as complete
in detail as possible.
(4) Shoreline photographs taken through sub
marine periscopes.
(5) Maps, charts, shoreline sketches, and still
photos of the beach area.
(6) Special studies prepared by theater intel
ligence agencies.
(7) Reports of PW interrogation, former resi
dents of the objective area, underground
sources, and clandestine operations.
(8) Terrain studies.
(9) Recorded meteorological and phenomena
data.
T). These aids are carefully studied by the battalion
commander and his staff. Emphasis is placed upon
analysis of the beach conditions and terrain from the
shore engineer viewpoint. Additional aids, such as
sand table models of the beach area, are secured or
prepared by the operations officer.
82. Recommendations
a. Throughout the planning phase, the battalion
commander makes a continuous estimate of the situ
ation, based upon the directives and information
given to him by higher headquarters, and the studies
made by his staff. His estimates will result in deci
sions concerning the employment of the reinforced
battalion, and in recommendations regarding the
most efficient organization of the beach support area.
As an adviser to the landing force headquarters on
shore party matters, he will be required to contribute
69
technical information and planning assistance on
all phases of beach operations.
~b. Recommendations on the priority of landing
shore party personnel and equipment are submitted
to the commander of the amphibious support regi
ment. These recommendations are given in con
siderable detail, and specify the shipping space re
quired to transport battalion personnel and equip
ment. The battalion commander pays particular
attention to insuring that special equipment, such as
bulldozers and cranes, will be landed quickly and
put to work immediately to prepare the beach.
83. Landing Force Operations Plan
a. Detailed preparations for an amphibious opera
tion are based upon the landing force operations plan.
This is usually a draft of the final operation order,
and includes—
(1) Date and hour of landing.
(2) Exact beaches to be used.
(3) Formation for the landing.
(4) Scheme of maneuver ashore.
(5) Fire plan.
(6) Ob j ective on the beachhead line.
(7) Intermediate objectives to the beachhead
line.
(8) Major scheme of shore party operations
(based upon the advice and recommenda
tions of the commanders and staffs of the
amphibious support regiment and its bat
talions) .
&. Separate annexes to the landing force opera
tions plan provide detailed instructions concerning

70
support fires, communications, intelligence, supply,
and evacuation.
84. Division Administrative Plan
a. The division G4 prepares an administrative plan
to support the operations plan. The administrative
plan later serves as a basis for the division admin
istrative order. Annexes include a logistics plan
and a shore party plan. Contained in the logistics
plan may be instructions concerning—
(1) Priorities for the loading, movement, and
unloading of shore party units not attached
to RCT's.
(2) The provision of shore parties for subordi
nate units, and the assistance to be given in
the organization and training of these shore
parties.
(3) The relief of RCT shore parties; consolida
tion and operation of supply, maintenance,
and evacuation facilities in the division
zone of beach operations.
(4) Initiation of construction projects.
(5) Procedure for initial handling of casual
ties and PWs for evacuation seaward by
the naval beach parties.
(6) Requisition of initial maintenance supplies.
(7) Reference to the shore party plan annex for
detailed information about these matters.
l>. Also included in the logistics plan are the
amounts and types of supplies to be landed, and the
supply levels that will be maintained. This infor
mation is of particular importance to the battalion
commander because it influences the personnel, equip
ment, transportation, and methods of operations he
71
will employ to accomplish his mission. He must
plan to move the required amount of supplies from
the edge of the beach into the proper dumps without
confusion, delays, or bottlenecks, and with a mini
mum of friction at each point in the process.
G. In amphibious operations, supplies of all classes
are divided into echelons, to coordinate loading and
unloading, and to facilitate the initial support of
units landing on separate beaches. These supply
echelons are—
(1) Individual reserves. These consist of water,
ammunition, rations, fuel, and medical sup
plies to sustain all landing force elements
for one or two days. They are loaded
aboard the ships carrying the assault troops,
and are largely carried ashore by the early
waves.
(2) Initial reserves. This echelon consists of
supplies of all classes to sustain the land
ing force elements for three to five days.
The initial reserves for each EOT are nor
mally carried aboard the ships that trans
port the team. These supplies are unloaded
by the shore party.
(3) Beach reserves. In this echelon are supplies
of all classes intended to sustain the land
ing force for from five to ten days. These
reserves provide continuity of supply dur
ing temporary interruptions caused by the
weather or enemy action.
(4) Landing force reserves. This echelon is
made up of supplies sufficient for a 30-day
period. They may accompany the assault
convoy in attack transports (APA), or may
72
 be shipped, in follow-up convoys arriving
between D plus 5 and D plus 10.
85. Division Shore Party Plan
a. The division shore party plan contains detailed
information about the enemy and friendly situa
tion, general and specific unit missions, administra
tion, and communications. In preparing this plan,
the division G4 is assisted by the commander of the
amphibious support regiment. (See app. II.)
5. Appendixes to the plan provide data about task
organization, beach conditions, the base development
plan, and work priorities. Many of the details are
indicated on a layout overlay which shows—
(1) The traffic circulation plan and traffic reg
ulating points.
(2) Locations of water points.
(3) Locations of all supply dumps, motor parks,
vehicle assembly areas, and dewaterproof-
ing areas.
(4) Troop holding areas.
(5) Shore party bivouac areas.
(6) First aid and evacuation stations.
(T) Division shore party command post.
(8) Defense positions.
(9) Division PW inclosure.
(10) Straggler collecting points.
(11) Information center.
c. If the beach support area will be developed into
a base after the operation ends, the plan indicates
the facilities and installations that must be initiated
by the shore party. Elements of the base service and
headquarters units that will operate the base are in
cluded in the shore party for reconnaissance, super-
73
 vision of construction activities, and initial assist
ance to the shore party in unloading or other beach
operations.
d. During the preparation of the base development
plan, close coordination is necessary between the
shore party commander and the base commander.
As far as possible, the organization of the beach sup
port area conforms to base development plans, which
outline the tentative locations chosen for base facili
ties, and give instructions regarding the gradual
turnover of responsibilities from the shore party to
base organizations.
86. Division Operation Order
a. During the initial preparations, operational de
tails are given in tentative, fragmentary orders.
Each lower unit then develops its plan concurrently
with the next higher unit. When the details of the
division operations plan become firm, the division
may publish a draft of the contemplated operation
order. The amphibious support regiment may also
issue a tentative operation order, on which the bat
talion bases its tentative order. Planning is con
tinuous at all levels, and usually results in a series
of changes and modifications in the original plans
for the operation.
&. The operation order finally published is a con
firmation of the completed plan. An order is pub
lished at each level in time to permit units to complete
their planning and issue their own operation order.
c. The operation order is accompanied by an ad
ministrative order, which includes detailed instruc
tions for shore party operations. It is based upon

74
the administrative plan previously issued, as modified
by subsequent changes.
87. Battalion Operations Plan
After careful study of intelligence, division plans,
and directives from the amphibious support regi
ment, the battalion commander announces his deci
sions and directs his staff to prepare a detailed plan
of operations. This is in the same form as the stand
ard five-paragraph operation order. It includes spe
cific task assignments and work priorities for all
elements of the shore party. Task assignments to
the shore companies will concern the essential pioneer
construction, development, operation, and defense of
the beach support area. Work priorities will include
obstacle clearance, construction of unloading facili
ties and roads, and cargo-handling.
88. Battalion Operation Order
a. After the operations plan has been approved
by higher headquarters, the staff prepares the oper
ation order. Each staff section provides its portion
of the order and any annex necessary. The opera
tions officer consolidates the order and submits it to
the executive officer for the commander's signature.
The order is then published and distributed to sub
ordinate and attached units.
&. The operation order and the overlays that ac
company it must be presented in a form as clear and
simple as completeness will permit. It should leave
no doubt in the mind of any subordinate commander
as to his mission and responsibilities.

75
89. Alternate Plan
a. Detailed alternate plans are prepared for use
if the operations plan proves unfeasible upon arrival
at the objective area. Alternate plans consider such
possibilities as adverse weather and surf conditions;
the loss of ships and craft; changes in the enemy
situation; possible changes in the beach landing area
enroute, or immediately upon arrival at the debarka
tion area. A standing operating procedure that can
be adapted readily to varying types of terrain and
beach conditions also provides flexibility in meeting
unanticipated changes in original plans.
5. A reinforced shore battalion assigned to a re
serve unit of the landing force must be particularly
well prepared for unexpected conditions. The bat
talion commander will not know beforehand which
beaches will be used by the reserve when it is com
mitted, what supply installations will be operating,
or what duties may be assigned to the battalion when
it is on shore. Beaches may be used which were not
contemplated in the planning phase, requiring hasty
organization following a brief reconnaissance. Here
again, a standing operating procedure for beach
organization will assist greatly in battalion opera
tions. If the engineer shore battalion is landed on a
beach already operated by another shore battalion,
it is employed to reinforce the existing shore party
or may be given construction missions.

76
 Section II. PLANNING FOR BEACH OPERATIONS

90. General
a. In preparing his plans for beach operations, the
battalion commander is particularly concerned
with—
(1) Enemy capabilities which can influence the
transfer of cargo, and the ability of the
shore party to safeguard it.
(2) The tactical scheme of maneuver, and the
landing plan.
(3) B'each, weather, and hydrographic condi
tions.
(4) B ase dovelopment plans.
(5) Amount of traffic crossing the beaches and
circulating in the beach area.
6. Detailed information about the terrain and
enemy dispositions in the objective area is usually
limited. The landing force is not in contact with
the enemy prior to landing, and the usual intelligence
sources are limited accordingly. The intelligence
annex to the landing force operation plan includes
information on both general and engineer intelli
gence matters. Since the intelligence annex contains
information required for planning, it may be issued
prior to the operations plan. Later information is
presented in appendixes issued after the plan has
been distributed. If the intelligence furnished is not
adequate for his needs, the battalion commander re
quests the S2 of the amphibious support regiment to
secure the information he desires.

77
91. Enemy Capabilities
a. Enemy activity and installations within the
landing area may hinder or aid shore party opera
tions. The enemy may slow down or stop unload
ing; on the other hand, undamaged enemy facilities
(wharves, jetties, heavy unloading equipment) may
provide a means for speeding up the unloading proc
ess. After a study of intelligence reports, the engi
neer shore battalion commander may recommend that
certain enemy installations be spared in prelanding
bombardment or demolition operations, so that they
may be used by the shore party.
1). Enemy courses of action which may hinder
shore party operations include—
(1) Surface or subsurface attacks on shipping
which would prevent or hinder the discharge
of cargo.
(2) Naval bombardment or harassment of shore
party installations ashore.
(3) Air attacks on shipping or shore installa
tions.
(4) Land-based artillery fire directed at ship
ping and beach activities.
(5) Raids, including counterlandings, directed
at destroying shore installations or haras
sing beach operations.
(6) Employment of mass destruction weapons,
including biological, chemical, or radiologi
cal contamination of the areas required for
shore party operations.
(7) Placement of obstacles, such as beach mines,
sunken ships, barriers, and ditches in locali
ties which would interfere with the dis-

78
 charge of cargo from landing craft or ships.
(8) Destruction or damage to previously exist
ing unloading, storage, and communication
facilities.
(9) Removal from the area of civilians who may
be able and willing to unload and store
supplies.
92. Tactical Plan
a. A study of the landing force tactical plan will
indicate to the battalion commander how he can
organize and employ the shore party elements most
effectively. He may also wish to recommend changes
in the beaches chosen for development, or the earlier
capture of certain terrain features to provide more
favorable beaches for shore party operations.
&. Since a shore party must be provided for each
unit of the landing force that lands on a separate
beach, the tactical scheme of maneuver will determine
the number of shore parties to be formed from the
reinforced engineer shore battalion. The assignment
of service detachments to the shore party platoons
and companies will depend upon RCT landing forma
tions. In a RCT landing with BLT's passing in
column over the same beach, for instance, only one
set of dumps would be needed, and BLT shore parties
would consolidate their efforts with the RCT shore
party.
93. Hydrography, Weather and Terrain
a. Hydrography and topography are considered
together with an analysis of the effect of weather con
ditions on shore party operations. Careful study
 will indicate what the probable employment of the
shore party will be, and what special equipment will
be needed. Extreme tidal ranges may restrict un
loading to the periods of high tide, requiring a maxi
mum speed of operation, and a rapid and heavy
buildup of supplies in the early stages of the assault
landing. Charts of the preceding one to three
months tide measurements, obtained by agents, are
used to determine very closely the ideal time at which
the landing should begin, if the tide is to be consid
ered as a major factor. Coral reefs and the depth of
water over them may make reef transfer operations
necessary. Beaches where vehicular traffic is espe
cially difficult will require increased quantities of
matting and other surfacing materials. The nature
of the terrain inland influences the size of the beach
support area, the siting of dumps and other installa
tions, and the amount of labor and equipment re
quired to prepare the beach operations.
&. The ideal beach, from a hydrographic point of
view, is one with no obstructions to seaward; deep
water close to shore; a firm bottom; minimum varia
tion in tides, currents, or surf, and with a beach
gradient of at least 5 percent, suitable for the beach
ing and retraction of all types of landing craft and
ships under all conditions of load at any time. For
efficient beach operations, the terrain should be gently
rising, relatively clear, and possess a firm surface
with adequate drainage. Such a beach will rarely
exist in the area desired for ground operations. From
beach studies included in the intelligence estimate
and annex, the battalion commander can determine—
(1) The length and width of the beach.

80
 (2) General character of the surf and inshore
currents, and their effects on landing ships
and craft.
(3) Beach gradient at various stages of the tide,
in relation to the suitability for beaching
and retraction of landing ships and craft.
(4) Composition of the beach; degree of slope.
(5) Position of the water line at various stages
of the tide with reference to natural and
artificial obstacles; distance from the low
watermark to the nearest cover or conceal
ment.
(6) Location of natural and artificial obstacles;
their effect on beaching and unloading land
ing ships and craft.
(7) Man-made facilities and installations of
possible value in shore party activities.
c. (1) Beach terrain is classified according to the
predominant surface material, such as silt,
sand, pebble, cobble, shingle, and boulders.
or by such combinations as cobble and shin
gle. There may be a wide variation in firm
ness between beaches, and between different
portions of the same beach. A beach is usu
ally firmest when it is damp, when eroding,
and when the material size is small. Silt
and clay may be firm when they are com
bined with fine sand. Cobble, pebble, and
shingle are firm as far as bearing strength
is concerned. The type and size of the ma
terial largely determine the firmness of the
beach.
(2) From analysis of the beach studies, the bat
talion commander can determine the
305640—54———6 81
 amounts and types of equipment he will
need. For example, if a beach is known to
be firm enough to bear the equipment and
traffic expected, landing mats and other sur
facing materials need not be carried in the
early waves. On the other hand, the beach
characteristics may require a great quantity
of dunnage, matting, and similar materials.
Dense vegetation and mangroves may de
mand special cutting tools and machinery.
Water obstacles, swamps, and marshes may
indicate that a large number of amphibious
vehicles will be necessary for on-shore
employment.
d. Terrain immediately inland from the beach
should provide cover, concealment, and dispersal for
dumps and other installations. In studying this ter
rain, the battalion commander determines—
(1) The number of beach exits available, and
the requirements for additional beach exits.
(2) The beach road net, and the requirements
for adidtional roads.
(3) Obstacles immediately in-rear of the beaches,
such as swamps, streams, canals, hills, sand
dunes, forests, or roadblocks, and the engi
neer equipment and personnel that would be
required to remove them.
(4) availability of suitable dump sites.
(5) Trafficability of the area for wheeled and
tracked vehicles.
(6) Local security and beach defense require
ments.

82
 (7) Natural and artificial obstacles and their
effect on unloading or storage, and the engi
neer effort required to remove them.
(8) Possible water sources.
e. Weather information given in the intelligence
annex is also studied to determine its effect upon
beach operations. The battalion commander notes
the predicted temperatures, precipitation, storms,
and similar phenomena that will determine the
equipment and engineer supplies required, as well as
indicate what working conditions will be like during
the period of operations. Soil trafficability maps
must always be interpreted in the light of both exist
ing and predicted weather conditions.
94. Traffic Control
a. Traffic circuits and control in the beach support
area must be carefully planned. The shore battalion
commander, after a study of the proposed beach
organization, recommends measures for regulating
traffic, suitable vehicle routes, and restrictions to be
observed. The division administrative order pre
scribes the plan of traffic circulation in detail. In
planning traffic circulation, primary consideration is
given to the routes for tactical traffic and units being
landed and moved inland. The route for trucks and
DUKW's is plotted next. The completed traffic plan
shows the direction of movement permitted on all
one-way roads. Two-way roads normally are not
limited.
&. The control of DUKW's is important. They
are usually held on shore in assembly areas until
dispatched to a specific ship for cargo. Control on
shore is directed by the commanders of the DUKW
83
units. The shore company commander gives dis
patch instructions to the DUKW representative,
indicating the ship from which the DUKW is to
draw cargo. In some situations, DUKW's are di
rected from shore to a control boat sited near the
cargo ships. This boat then diverts them to a ship
that is ready to unload cargo into a DUKW. A rea
sonably smooth, firm, and gradually slopping strip
of beach is required for a DUKW landing point.
95. Other Planning Considerations
a. Water. The battalion commander determines
from intelligence reports the availability of potable
water in the beach support area; location of potential
water points; requirements for distillation or puri
fication; time at which water equipment must be
unloaded and put into operation ashore, and the
need for any special equipment, such as well-drilling
machinery, to insure an early source of drinking
water. Team GE, well drilling, of the engineer
service organization may be attached to the shore
party if the need for a well-drilling rig and operators
is anticipated.
l>. Local Labor and Materials. The objective
area may provide construction materials, quarries,
buildings, and other facilities of possible value in
shore party operations. Local labor may be avail
able for both manual and skilled tasks.
c. Health Conditions. Intelligence reports will
indicate the particular sanitary precautions that
must be observed.
d. Foliage and Coloration. These considerations
will determine the type of camouflage that will be

84
most effective, the requirements for camouflage mate
rials, and the best camouflage scheme for the area.

Section III. SHORE PARTY PREPARATIONS

96. Staff Augmentation

To meet the problems of control and administra
tion created by the expansion of the engineer shore
battalion into the shore party for a specific opera
tion, the battalion staff must be augmented. Officers
and men from the attached units are designated as
assistants to battalion headquarters personnel. Bat
talion supply and administrative personnel are
strongly augmented by suitably trained personnel
from the attached units, to meet the heavy workload
involved in preparing for an operation. If nec-
sary, the shore party commander sets up additional
positions and staff sections to handle plans, prepara
tions, and supervisory duties required by the particu
lar operation.
97. Administration
a. The battalion adjutant is responsible for shore
party administration. This includes the reception
and billeting of individuals and troops when they
arrive to join the newly formed shore party. The
adjutant functions through the administrative per
sonnel of the organic and attached units.
T). As one of his first actions when the shore party
is assembled, the adjutant arranges for the reclassi-
fication of all persons who are physically or other
wise unfit for combat operations. A pool of trained
replacements is highly desirable, since a large num
ber of the men in the engineer shore battalion are
85
skilled specialists. The adjutant should make an
estimate of the losses expected in the operation, and
request a suitable number of replacements from the
amphibious support regiment. He keeps informed
of the strength of all shore party units, and insures
that replacements are secured early enough to permit
proper training. If possible, the adjutant attempts
to secure an overstrength during the training phase.
c. Adequate quantities of all record and report
forms that will be required during beach operations
should be issued to subordinate units, and instruc
tions given in their use.
98. Supply
a. One of the first problems of the supply officer
is to determine the status of supply and equipment
throughout all units in the shore party. Steps are
taken immediately to secure the repair or replace
ment of all needed items. The supply officer works
closely with the operations officer to insure that his
supply preparations will support the shore party
adequately until normal supply sources are available
on the far shore. .
b. In determining the supplies and equipment re
quired, all commanders make certain that unneces
sary items are not transported, and that all unit
impedimenta is limited to the minimum necessary
for efficient operations. Just prior to embarkation,
showdown inspections are held to see that individu
als are carrying only essential articles and that all
men have the prescribed equipment.
c. All shore party supply officers should maintain
a file containing accurate data about the weights and
dimensions of organic vehicles and equipment, and
86
normal supplies, to facilitate the preparation of
loading plans.
d. The supply officer of the engineer shore bat
talion is. responsible for having signs made for use
in the ship-to-shore movement and in beach opera
tions. Since these are required in large quantities, it
is advisable to pool all signpainters from both the
shore party and landing force units.
99. Communications
Prior to embarkation, shore party communications
officers insure that all signal equipment is water
proofed, and, if the landing is to be made in a tropi
cal area, fungiproofed. Equipment and signal sup
plies are carefully checked, and steps are taken to
provide an adequate supply of batteries and spare
parts.
100. Medical Preparations
a. Medical preparations are based on the health
and sanitary conditions in the landing area, and
the estimated number of casualties that will require
treatment and evacuation by shore party medical
personnel. All members of the shore party must be
taught the hygiene and sanitary precautions that will
be necessary. Chronic seasickness cases should be
eliminated as soon as possible after the shore party
is formed. Frequent boat trips prior to embarkation
tend to adjust men to water travel, and reveal those
subject to chronic seasickness. If the operation takes
place in a tropical climate, men should acquire a tan
before embarkation. In addition to the routine im
munizations and medical inspections, all personnel

87
undergo a physical examination 48 hours prior to
embarkation.
6. Medical supplies should be carried in water
proof containers. Supplies for early use are carried
in troop spaces, rather than in the holds of transports.

Section IV. REHEARSALS

101. General
When preparations are complete, a rehearsal is
held by the landing force, following the plans pre
pared for the actual operation. If possible, one day
and one night rehearsal are held. These rehearsals
are completed sufficiently in advance of the sailing
date to permit any last-minute changes in the plans.
102. Purpose
A rehearsal is held to insure familiarity with the
plans, and to test them. It offers an opportunity to
correct errors and deficiencies before the plan is put
into effect, particularly in regard to time and space
factors. An opportunity is offered to consolidate
the various shore party elements into a team, and to
check on the efficiency of control, liaison, and com
munication arrangements.
103. Organization
The rehearsal is conducted with all the amphibi
ous shipping necessary to lift the entire task force.
All shore party elements take part.
104. Scheduled Waves
In the rehearsal, only the scheduled waves are
landed, following the time schedule established in
88
the operation order. The reconnaissance parties of
the shore battalion land with the scheduled waves,
while the remainder of the shore party is held on
call. All elements in the scheduled waves initiate
their missions according to plan. The shore party
carries on its functions of command, reconnaissance,
pioneer tasks, and defense of the beach support area
as it will in the actual operation.
105. Equipment
Only a limited amount of equipment is landed by
the shore party in a rehearsal. Equipment necessary
to develop the beach area beyond token unloading is
not landed. Control and communication equipment
is limited to that necessary to establish and operate
the signal nets, and to identify the landing points.
The extent of unloading during a rehearsal will de
pend upon the time available, the probable loss and
damage to equipment and supplies, and the experi
ence of the shore party troops.
106. Rehearsal Sites
From intelligence data, a rehearsal site is selected
locally which contains as many characteristics of
the assault area as possible. The site is prepared
with the same obstacle barriers as the enemy beach.
107. Critique
Following a rehearsal, critiques are held by all
commanders. Necessary changes in the plan are
made, and additional training is given to the units
to correct deficiencies uncovered during the rehearsal.

89
 CHAPTER 7
EMBARKATION

Section I. GENERAL
108. General
a. The engineer shore battalion and its reinforcing
elements are included in the embarkation plans and
organization of the units they support during the
initial stages of the landing. The chief contribution
of battalion headquarters to embarkation planning
consists of providing the staffs of the supported units
with information as to space and cargo-handling
requirements.
5. The temporary administrative organization for
embarking a landing force is built upon the embar
kation team. This is any element or combination of
elements assigned to a single vessel for transport to
the objective area. Usually it is a battalion landing
team (BLT). The embarkation group is the basic
organization for embarking the troops, equipment,
and supplies of the landing force. The group is
composed of the troops and cargo to be embarked in
a single transport division or similar naval task or
ganization. While an infantry regimental combat
team (ECT) usually forms the nucleus of an em
barkation group, other types of groups may be formed
from division artillery units, special battalions, di
vision service and supply units, or a combination of
such units. An embarkation group does not neces
sarily follow any naval or troop task organization.
c. The Navy organization to transport a landing
force is made up of transport and tractor divisions,
90
squadrons, and groups. A transport division is in
tended to transport a landing force of about RCT
size. While it may vary considerably in composition,
depending upon the requirements of a particular
operation, a transport division might consist of four
or five attack transports (APA), and one or two
attack cargo ships (AKA). Landing craft and land
ing ships may also be assigned. Two or more trans
port divisions comprise a transport squadron. A
transport group consists of a transport squadron,
plus additional landing ships. The slower vessels of
a transport group are organized into a tractor squad
ron including LST, LSM, and landing craft, tank
(LOT) divisions. A tractor squadron may proceed
to the landing area as a separate convoy, because of
its slower speed.
d. The infantry division issues an embarkation
plan which includes the allocation of ships, and the
composition of embarkation groups. Usually this
information is presented in chart form. The RCT
embarkation plan, based on the division plan, shows
the organization of the embarkation teams, and as
signs each team to a single vessel. Instructions for
embarking elements of the shore party are based
upon the recommendations of the shore battalion
commander.
e. Upon receipt of the embarkation plan, the bat
talion commander divides the shore party into appro
priate subgroups for the embarkation teams to which
they are assigned. Units and headquarters personnel
embark with the landing force organizations they
will support initially in the operation. As far as
possible, troops and equipment are distributed so as

91
to insure balanced working units if a ship or craft
is sunk en route to the objective area.
/. The final division embarkation order includes—
(1) Organization of embarkation groups and as
signment of shipping.
(2) Supplies and equipment to be embarked
(amounts and types; preparation of supplies
and equipment for embarkation; movement
to the cargo assembly areas).
(3) Schedule for loading.
(4) Preparation of loading*points and areas,
including the construction or improvements
required in the embarkation area.
(5) Assignment of such loading devices as fork-
lift trucks, cranes, roller conveyors; and
warehouse pallets.
(6) Traffic circulation and control system.
(7) Schedule and method for embarking per
sonnel.
(8) Embarkation points and cargo assembly
areas.
(9) Special loading instructions for fragile or
dangerous cargo.
g. Details of embarkation organization, plans, and
procedures are given in FM 60-30. Typical organi
zation of embarkation groups and teams is shown
in FM 60-5 and FM 60-10.

Section II. NEAR-SHORE OPERATIONS

109. General
The near-shore activities of the engineer shore bat
talion will vary, depending upon the facilities avail
able at the place of embarkation, and the size of the
9?
supported unit. If the landing force embarks at an
established port, practically all labor and facilities
will be furnished by the port organization. On the
other hand, if the reinforced battalion must provide
the sole shore party support for a landing force op
erating independently, it will be responsible for al
most all phases of embarkation.
110. Embarkation Area
A typical embarkation area (fig. 6) provides—
a. Loading slots where beached landing craft or
ships are loaded.
5. Cargo storage areas in rear of each loading slot
where the load for each ship or craft is assembled.
c. Parking areas for vehicles to be loaded.
d. Motor repair facilities.
e. Motor convoy turnaround facilities.
111. Shore Engineer Tasks
a. When embarkation is not from an organized
port, the engineer shore battalion will construct and
operate the embarkation area, under the direction of
the amphibious support regiment. Elements of the
battalion will—
(1) Lay out and prepare loading slots, hard-
stands, causeways, and ramps.
(2) Clear and level cargo assembly and vehicle
staging areas.
(3) Construct roads in the area, or improve
existing roads.
(4) Mark embarkation beaches.
(5) Establish and maintain regulating points,
and provide communication facilities to in-

93
 LEGEND
—f TRAFFIC

[7] TRAFFIC CONTROL POST

!•

Figure 6. Typical embarkation area.

 sure a proper flow of supplies and equip
ment to the loading points.
(6) Supervise and assist in ship and craft load
ing.
(7) Supervise and assist in the waterproofing
of vehicles and equipment. (Deep-water
waterproofing kits and technical guidance
are provided by ordnance personnel.)
(8) Install and operate lighting equipment.
(Once begun, embarkation continues with
out interruption. Occasionally, tide con
ditions may require all loading to be done
at night.)
l>. The commander of the amphibious support regi
ment is kept informed of the progress of the battalion
through both regular and informal reports.
o. The battalion is reinforced by personnel from
organizations not scheduled to embark in the assault
shipping, and by engineer units from the landing
force.
d. All vehicles and equipment engaged in embark
ation area tasks are employed until the last prac
ticable moment before they must in turn be loaded.

Section III. LOADING

112. Loading Plans

a. Before loading plans can be prepared, the
priority in which shore party equipment and sup
plies will be needed upon landing must be deter
mined. This requires study of the operational plan
by the battalion commander and his staff. When
the far-shore priority has been determined, the bat-

95
taliou commander submits loading priority lists to
the headquarters of the amphibious support regi
ment. The battalion commander is responsible for
having the troops, equipment, and supplies of the
shore party available for loading when and where
the embarkation group commanders specify.
l>. Loading plans and activities of the shore party
are usually directed by the battalion executive offi
cer, who insures that the staff sections and unit com
manders assemble and submit the required informa
tion. Close liaison is maintained with the staffs of
embarkation teams and groups, and of the amphib
ious support regiment. Loading officers of the land
ing force will require considerable data from bat
talion headquarters, including unit personnel and
tonnage tables, vehicle summary and priority tables,
cargo and loading analyses, cargo manifests, rosters,
and breakdowns of equipment and supplies. These
forms are explained in FM 60-30.
c. As a guide to subordinate units, the division
headquarters usually issues standing operating pro
cedures for packing, crating, and marking supplies
and equipment; preparation of wheeled and tracked
vehicles for embarkation and pallet loading.
113. Types and Capabilities of Shipping
a. The landing of engineer equipment is greatly
facilitated by the use of landing ships, such as LST's
(fig. 7) or LCU's, if beaching operations will permit
their employment. The ideal method of transporta
tion for equipment having a high landing priority
is the use of preloaded LCU's embarked aboard
LSD's. The LSM and LCU have similar capabili-

96
ties for transporting engineer equipment although
the LCU has superior beaching characteristics, due
to its shallow draft.
5. The use of APA's and AKA's for transporting
heavy equipment is not desirable, since the larger
number of heavy lifts required both in embarkation
and debarkation causes excessive delays in handling.
c. If hydrographic conditions do not permit the
use of landing ships at the time and place desired,
equipment may be loaded in landing craft. It is also
possible that, while hydrographic conditions may be
favorable for the use of landing ships, the tactical
situation expected at the time of landing may make
it unfeasible to use them because of their size and
vulnerability.

Figure 7. Landing ship, tank.

303040—54———7 97
 114. Cargo Assembly
a. There are two basic methods used in assembling
cargo in an embarkation area; type assembly and unit
assembly.
&. In type assembly, the principal classes of supply
(such as rations, ammunition, and fuel) are assem
bled in central dumps. "When the embarkation team
begins loading, it draws the amounts needed from
each dump.
c. In unit assembly, each ship has a designated por
tion of the embarkation area. When loading begins,
trucks are routed directly from the ship assembly
area to the appropriate loading point. Loading pro
ceeds more rapidly than when type assembly is used.
115. Types of Loading
a. There are two types of loading used in amphib
ious operations: commercial and unit loading. The
latter may be further classified as combat, organiza
tional, or convoy loading.
&. Commercial loading is used for bulk resupply,
and for movements of rear echelon and garrison
forces between established ports. Troops are not
available for operational use until their equipment
has been fully unloaded and redistributed to them.
Commercial loading uses available ship space with
out considering the priority of debarkation.
c. Combat loading is the loading of an assault unit,
with its essential combat equipment and initial com
bat supplies, in the same ship and in such a manner
as to facilitate debarkation and arrival ashore in the
sequence required by the tactical plan. Troops are
loaded in boat teams, and billeted so that they can

98
clebark rapidly on landing craft. Supplies are loaded
so that items needed early on the beach are readily
accessible and can be unloaded according to a planned
priority.
d. Organizational loading places troops with their
equipment and supplies on the same ship, but to con
serve space, equipment is not stowed so as to permit
simultaneous discharge with the troops. It is often
used for transporting the reserve units of an amphib
ious force, and also permits the diversion of complete
shiploads of troop units while en route to the orig
inally scheduled destination.
e. Convoy loading places all supplies, personnel,
and equipment in one convoy. No attempt is made
to insure that troops and their equipment are in the
same vessel. Troops are available for tactical em
ployment only when they are landed on established
beachheads and can be given time to assemble their
supplies and equipment. Convoy loading may be
used to fill space on transports carrying combat-
loaded organizations.
116. Preparation of Equipment and Cargo
a. General. Equipment must be prepared in such
a way that it will be protected from damage in han
dling and from the weather, and also to afford the
easiest handling during loading and unloading. In
structions for preparing supplies, equipment, and
vehicles are usually contained in standing operating
procedures.
6. Vehicles and Mobile Equipment.
(1) All vehicles and trailers should be combat
loaded. If no organic load is assigned, then
rations, ammunition, or other supplies
99
 should be carried. This places as much as
possible on wheels, and reduces the amount
of cargo-handling required by the shore
party on the beach. Fuel tanks should be
three-fourths full, to permit expansion and
allow for splashing. Vehicles should carry
a reserve of fuel and lubricants, in 5-gallon
cans, as well as combat rations for the
drivers. Specific quantities of critical items
(mines, hand tools, explosives) may be
loaded on trucks or amphibious vehicles to
provide for their early arrival ashore.
(2) Bows are removed from the tops of combat-
loaded vehicles and stowed in the vehicle.
Trucks should be loaded no higher than the
highest point on the vehicle, with the canvas
tops securely cross-lashed over loads to pro
tect them from the weather, and to prevent
losing the contents if the vehicle is tilted
during loading or unloading operations.
(3) Vehicles and other motorized equipment
must be waterproofed before loading. Wa
terproofing procedure is described in detail
in TM 9-2853.
(4) Drivers and assistants are embarked on the
same vessels as their vehicles.
(5) Vehicles and equipment carried on the ex
posed decks of vessels must have the head
lights, windshields, windows, rear-view
mirrors, tailgate reflectors, and similar re
flecting surfaces covered.
(6) D-8 bulldozers, and D-Ts with wide blades,
must be loaded in craft or ships larger than
the LCM. They are usually carried on
100
 the tank decks of LST's at the bow, so that
the dozers will be the first equipment landed,
available to tow stalled vehicles out of the
way of the shore ramp, maintain the LST
beach approach, and pull rolled matting off
the LST into position if the beach is too
soft for wheeled vehicles. Each bulldozer
is equipped with an additional short towing
cable, and a long one, fixed to the dozer.
Cables on cable-operated equipment must be
new, so that they will not break in the early
stages of beach operations.
(7) Cranes are usually loaded in LSM's or
LST's. Some cranes may be carried in
LCM's transported to the far shore by
LSD's, provided that heavy seas or surf are
not encountered. Cranes are equipped with
long and short slings, in new condition.
Boom extensions are wired to the crane, so
as to be available immediately upon landing.
(8) It is desirable to load about 10,000 sandbags,
some filled with sand; 300 feet of roller
conveyor, and 100 yards of metal surfac
ing material on each LST. Matting and
sandbags should be placed in the nose of
the ship, so that a firm causeway can be
built rapidly for the discharge of vehicles
and heavy equipment. Beach matting may
be loaded on pole-type trailers carried in
the bow of the vessel.
(9) Equipment with sensitive parts, such as ex
posed valves, should be loaded on the tank
deck when carried in an LST, to prevent
damage from salt water spray.
101
 (10) Trailer-mounted generators should carry
prefabricated lighting standards that can
be erected quickly when illumination is re
quired.
(11) All equipment is serviced before loading
so as to be in the best possible mechanical
condition, since normal repair and mainte
nance facilities will not be available until
the later stages of the landing. An ade
quate supply of repair parts must be
provided.
(12) Shore party personnel and equipment
should be marked so that they can be readily
identified. A marking of color and shape
prescribed for the operation should be
painted in appropriate places on uniforms
and equipment, the marking being as large
as possible, to insure recognition at a dis
tance and at times of low visibility.
c. Communication Equipment.
(1) Shore party communications personnel must
insure that their equipment is loaded so
that it will be readily accessible, and can
be unloaded in the desired priority. Com
munication equipment to be employed in the
early stages of the landing should be
stowed in the ship message center, auxiliary
radio rooms, radio spare parts storage
locker, or other spaces under the control of
the ship communication officer, so that it
can be inspected and serviced conveniently
during the voyage. Batteries should be
stowed in cool, dry places. Pyrotechnics are
placed in the ship pyrotechnics locker.
102
 (2) Loading of communications equipment
should be supervised by communications
personnel, to insure careful handling, and to
make certain that all the components of a
set are loaded together.
(3) All signal equipment and supplies which
would be damaged by immersion must be
waterproofed. It is desirable that the
equipment be packed so that, if dropped in
water, it would float.
d. General Cargo.
(1) All general cargo must be covered or sealed
to protect it from rain or salt water. Any
material which may be damaged in han
dling should be crated or packaged. How
ever, packing and crating must be held to
the minimum requirements, since it adds to
the weight and size of each item. Where
possible, boxes and crates should not exceed
a size of 36 x 18 x 18 inches, and a weight of
40 pounds. Sizes and weights in excess of
these add to the handling difficulties of the
shore party on the beach.
(2) General cargo may be placed on pallets (pre
fabricated platforms) for ease of handling.
Pallets are described in FM 60-30.
(3) Pyrotechnics are palletized in the pyro
technic locker, and are at no times stored
in the same hold compartment with ammu
nition or explosives. Ammunition is pal
letized as regular cargo.
e. Stowage Responsibility. All stowage of cargo
must be approved by the ship captain, since he is
responsible for his ship.
103
117. Marking Equipment
a. Detailed information concerning marking re
quirements is contained in SK. 746-30-5 and SR
55-720-1. All materiel must be marked to indicate
its unloading priority number, and the hatch and
deck where it is to be stowed. For example: 16 4/D
means that the item has priority 16 for unloading,
and is to be stowed in hatch No. 4 on D deck.
&. Markings are placed on the top and both sides
of each item. Vehicles are marked with 9" to 12"
numbers on top of the hood, and on both sides of the
cab. They may be made with white chalk, which is
easy to read, but must also be applied with wax
crayon or other type of waterproof material, so that
the identification will not be lost if the chalk marks
are washed off by rain or spray. Identifying marks
should be placed on all items that will be needed
promptly upon landing.
c. Copies of packing lists should not be placed on
the outside of containers. The number identifies a
package to the owner; a list serves only as a con
venient means for pilferers to decide whether or not
they want a particular box.
d. It is particularly important that any equipment
which has been partially disassembled for loading
be marked, loaded, and landed as a unit to facilitate
reassembly.

118. Loading Time Requirements

a. Where pier facilities are available, an APA may
be loaded with 800 tons of cargo and a normal com
plement of personnel in 24 hours, and an AKA can
be loaded to capacity, about 2,000 tons, in 72 hours.

104
Without pier facilities, APA's may be loaded in a
day and a half, and AKA's within four days, if
weather and sea conditions are favorable. In order
to allow for breakdowns and other delaying factors,
a period of two or more additional days should be
allowed for loading a transport division.
b. When practicable, a good method is to load the
APA's of each transport division at the same time,
after the AKA's have been loaded. This method
holds most of the unit transportation until AKA's
are loaded. Under these conditions, using the same
berths and cargo assembly areas successively, a trans
port squadron may be loaded in about nine days,
allowing one day between loadings to spot cargo
and move ships.
Section IV. LOADING PROCEDURE

119. General
a. Loading is supervised by the embarkation offi
cers of the embarkation groups and teams. The engi
neer shore battalion S4 or his representative should
be present to assist the embarkation officers when
ever supplies or equipment belonging to the shore
party are loaded. Because the landing ships are used
largely to transport heavy equipment and vehicles,
the shore party commander is usually the embarka
tion officer for a tractor squadron.
Z>. The engineer shore companies are prepared to
furnish assistance to the landing force by supervi
sion, equipment, and rough construction.
120. Sequence
Whether the operation is ship-to-shore or shore-
to-shore, cargo is loaded first, mobile equipment next,
105
and personnel last. This allows unloading in reverse
order on the far shore. Organic vehicles and equip
ment can be used on the near shore until they must
in turn be loaded, and personnel can be employed
at essential duties until their embarkation is neces
sary. It is undesirable to have idle troops aboard
ships at a port of embarkation.
121. Loading Details
a. Before loading begins, cargo is arranged by
hold, platform, or deck according to the priority in
which it will be loaded. If the transport is loaded
offshore, cargo is placed on the beach in hold lots by
loading priority, and transferred to the transport
by landing craft or amphibious vehicles.
5. Labor details for loading are provided by the
landing force, and may include supervisory shore
party personnel. The shore party provides the labor
for its own loading. At established ports, Transpor
tation Corps personnel may supervise the loading,
and provide port company stevedores or civilian labor
to load ships. The port companies are trained in
discharging and loading cargo vessels.. A Type A
company is designed to handle a complete operation,
providing all personnel. It is capable of discharg
ing an average vessel in a 24-hour period at the rate
of 720 short tons a day, and can load at the rate of
500 short tons a day. The Type B company provides
supervisory personnel to operate hatch crews pro
vided from other organizations. One company is
capable of supervising about 1,200 unskilled laborers
in loading and unloading.

106
 Section V. VOYAGE TO LANDING AREA

122. General
a. Shore party elements travel with the embarka
tion group and teams to which they are assigned.
The commander of the group or team is commander
of troops on board the vessel, and shore party per
sonnel are subject to his orders.
T). Members of the shore party may be detailed to
serve as mess personnel, inspectors, guards, and on
fatigue details, as directed by the commander of
troops. The surgeon and members of the medical
detachment usually assist ship and landing force
medical personnel of the ship on which they are em
barked.
c. Details of shipboard organization, regulations,
and requirements are given in FM 60-5.
123. Training
a. The period of the voyage is used for a compre
hensive training program aimed at insuring that
troops are oriented, briefed, and rehearsed in the
procedures to be followed in the objective area.
5. General shipboard training, supervised by the
commander of troops, includes—
(1) Aircraft recognition, stressing identifica
tion of friendly, and enemy aircraft that
may be encountered in the area.
(2) Map reading, emphasizing familiarization
with the maps and aerial photographs to be
used at the objective.
(3) Intelligence instruction, covering indoctri
nation in the characteristics, customs, and

107
 language, both of the enemy and of civilian
inhabitants in the area.
(4) A supervised program of physical exercise.
This is especially important, since condi
tions on ship limit exercise and movements,
and troops must be kept fit for combat con
ditions. The program includes setting-up
exercises, boxing, wrestling, and judo. The
ship usually provides climbing ropes, Jacob's
ladders, cargo nets, and similar facilities for
exercise.
(5) Survival at sea training, including lectures,
demonstrations, and practice. This train
ing should include survival if the ship is
sunk at sea, as well as what to do if a land
ing craft sinks on the way to shore, or the
soldier steps into a deep underwater hole
while leaving the craft.
c. Communications personnel follow an intensive
training program that includes—
(1) Study of signal orders and instructions per
taining to the operation.
(2) Practice in handling the cryptographic sys
tem to be employed.
(3) Drills in message center procedure.
(4) Training in recognition of key officers of the
shore party and of the supported unit.
d. In planning for shipboard training aids, units
should provide public address systems, or make ar
rangements to use the portable systems usually avail
able on transports. The noise aboard ship fre
quently makes it difficult for instruction to be heard
by all troops without amplifying equipment.

108
124. Orientation
a. When the landing team embarks, only the em
barkation team commander and key members of the
staff know the full details of the operation. Once
the ship is under way, the troops are oriented on their
destination and the part they will play in the assault
landing. At orientation conferences, officers are.as
sembled and informed of their destination, mission,
and the detailed plan for the use of their units. The
troop officers then assemble their units and pass on
information about the plans and orders they have
received. All phases of the mission are discussed in
detail with the troops, and all available intelligence
data are reviewed. Briefing is a continuous process,
conducted whenever new information is received re
garding the enemy and conditions at the objective.
&. Training aids are helpful in orientation. En
larged maps and aerial photographs, and relief maps,
are displayed in parts of the ship where they can be
studied. They show the beaches, boundaries, zones
of action, and the general scheme of maneuver. Deck
maps, consisting of colored sketches or paintings that
show the landing beaches and terrain immediately
inland, are particularly effective.
125. Inspections
Daily compartment inspections are conducted
jointly by ship and troop personnel. Officers of the
shore party units conduct inspections of equipment
and vehicles to insure that they will function prop
erly when debarked. These inspections include—
a. Inspection of waterproofing.
b. Check for gas and oil leakages.

109
 c. Inspection of shoring to see that vehicles and .
equipment are well secured.
d. Tire inspections.
e. Testing of storage batteries for charge and
water level.
/. Engines (particularly on LST's) are cranked
up daily to insure that they are in good mehanical
condition.
126. Drills
a. To make sure that debarkation will be rapid
and efficient, day and night debarkation drills are
held during the voyage. The first few drills consist
of walkthroughs to familiarize each boat team with
its assembly area and the route to its debarkation
station. Boat teams then rehearse with their equip
ment, duplicating the debarkation routine as it will
be executed in the actual landing.
1). During debarkation drills, drivers go to the
hatch where their vehicles and equipment are located.
c. Troops on board landing ships rehearse board
ing the vehicles on which they will go ashore.
127. Final Preparations
Final preparations for debarkation are begun 24
hours before the vessels arrive in. the objective area,
and should be completed in time to afford personnel
as much rest as possible before the actual hour of
debarkation. These preparations include—
a. Issue of ammunition, pyrotechnics, water, ra
tions, and special equipment.
b. Inspection of vehicles and heavy equipment for
serviceability, waterproofing, and readiness for de
barkation. When practicable, loading slings may
no
be attached to vehicles and equipment that will be
unloaded first.
c. Inspection oi each man for completeness of
clothing, combat equipment, and supplies.
d. All equipment and supplies that can be pre-
loaded are placed in their respective landing craft.
Other equipment is spotted at the proper loading
station. All equipment is secured to prevent damage
or loss.
e. Communication equipment is checked for cor
rect settings, serviceability, and waterproofing.
Particular attention is given to the condition of
batteries. Arrangements are made to load fragile
signal equipment, such as radios, at the rail, vising
ropes and guide lines. Ponchos, tarpaulins and
similar waterproof covers are provided to protect
equipment during the ship-to-shore movement.
/. All watches are synchronized with ship's time.
<j. Final conferences are held by the embarkation
team commander with commanders and staff officers
of subordinate units. At this time, any last-minute
changes in the situation or the operation order are
announced and discussed.
h. Troops are fed a full hot meal for the last ship
board meal, and assault rations then are issued for
beach use.

111
 CHAPTER 8

DEBARKATION

Section I. GENERAL

128. Landing Sequence

The sequence of events for an amphibious opera
tion may proceed as follows:
a. At about D minus 5, minesweepers move in and
sweep the seas in which the fleet is to maneuver.
They are accompanied and protected by air and na
val combat units.
6. On D minus 1, underwater demolition teams are
put ashore to demolish underwater obstacles and to
verify beach conditions. Also starting at about D
minus 1, the naval and air bombardment of the as
sault area begins.
c. On D-day, the amphibious force arrives off the
assault beach in the early hours of the morning. At
about H minus 2, the heavy bombardment of the
beach area begins. This includes long-range fire
against specific targets by battleships, cruisers, and
destroyers, and bombardment by heavy aircraft.
d. At about H minus 1, the destroyer bombard
ment begins. The beach and areas on both flanks
and to the rear are covered by gunfire until about ten
minutes before H-hour. Dive bombing and strafing
attacks are intensified.
e. At this time the rocket ships, LCM (E), come
in and give close fire support as the destroyer and
air attacks lift to areas near the beach. LCM (R) 's,

112
LCM (F)'s, LVTA's, and LVT (K)'s, if employed,
accompany the initial waves and give close rocket
and machine gun support in this period. (See
figs. 8 and 9.)
/. At H-hour the first wave, generally consisting
of LVT (A), lands on the beach, followed by infan
try troops in LVT and LCVP waves. In general,
each succeeding wave brings in heavier equipment
and more heavily equipped troops. LCM's coming
in the early waves bring in bulldozers, signal com
munication trucks, the first necessary heavy equip
ment. LCU's or LSM's bring in high priority
equipment, such as bulldozers, graders, and cranes
to aid in shore party operations.
g. Last to land will be the LST's and LSM's, car
rying large numbers of vehicles. If the operation
is not heavily opposed, this will be about ninety
minutes after H-hour. At this time the road net
ashore must be ready. If the beach is shallow, the
.LST's drop ponton barges and push them ashore, or
LCU's brought in LSD's may act as causeways for
the discharge of the LST's. Sand ramps are built by
shore engineers to facilitate the discharge of vehicles
and equipment.
h. The cargo ships, APA's and AKA's, are then
discharged by their own craft and by LCU's dis
patched to them.
129. Landing Categories
Troops, supplies, and equipment landed during
the assault phase may be classified into five categories;
scheduled waves, on-call waves, nonscheduled serials,
floating dumps, and landing force supplies.

305640—54———8 113
 n (bach

Marten) IR iin IR n
Rod I

w.y« n _/-i»«
CmdiTf \ Stoup
OQQQdQOQD^Cmdr
LCVP5 _
ZdWi.e OQQOCTQOQQ Boat Urwi
ox
£
3dw7;v ydi
QQDfl^flQ ' 2 0 •9 I: :2

4tK W.». OOOatillQQQ

5th W.v.
Lino
f
OQQDd^OOQ
*r Ant J _
iffiS- 1 r "h r 7
f
of Dtp.rtui j if 1
Secondary Primary Control Socondary Secondary
Control Control Control
(Rod'sIacM (Blue Beaches)

Approx
1000 ydl

/ °« 0 0 0 0
0 Q 6tnWav. Q 00
(floating Dump and
Boated on Call Uniti)

Caiu.lty (viciutio
LST(H|
sT
1ST (H|

.(f.
Cantral Control Vend

Approi.
2000 ydl Landing Ship Area Landing Ship Area
Able Baker

Inner Transport Area

Approx
8000 ydl

Tr«niport Are Traniport Ar«

Eaiy Fo«
| Rendezvous AreaJ

500
LO
.^'Secondary
(f
Q Control
to
1500 Bt~Gp
(f
yds Cmdr

(f

Aucmbly Ar««t

Figure 8. Organization of sea area, ship-to-shore movement.

114
 20 WAVE
2-8
FREE BOAT

3-4 3-1 Q 30 WAVE

CONTROL CONTROL '

VESSEL VESSEL
LD———0——— ———Q————LD

X"*~~x
LEGEND
( 5 TH \ / 4 TH \
\ WAVE I ' WAVE y U -LCVP

V_V V^.-'
Q

P -WAVE
COMMANDER

l-'il/urc !). Boat movement of HLT from tlie line of departure

to tlic beach.

a. /Scheduled ipaves consist of landing craft or am

phibious vehicles loaded with assault troops and their
initial combat supplies. The time and place of land-
115
 ing, and formations, are previously specified; no
change is made in the schedule except in an emer
gency. Their landing begins at H-hour, and con
tinues for a short period of time, perhaps 50 minutes,.
for example.
5. On-call waves consist of elements of the land
ing force, with their initial combat supplies, that
will be needed ashore at an early hour, but at a time
and place that cannot be predicted, and hence is not
specified. On-call waves are composed of units sub
ject to an immediate emergency call, such as reserve
infantry battalions, tanks, and BLT shore parties.
They are embarked in landing craft, landing ships,.
or amphibious vehicles. On-call waves are located
in the sea area so as to be available shortly after
H-hour. If necessary, the landing of other elements
(scheduled waves only in an emergency) may be in
terrupted to permit landing the on-call waves.
c. Nonscheduled serials are the remaining units of
the landing force, with their initial combat supplies,
to be landed before general unloading begins. In
cluded are the bulk of the combat and service support
elements not placed in scheduled or on-call waves,
such as artillery, engineers, reserve infantry regi
ments, and shore party units. Their need ashore is
usually not of an emergency nature, and they are
landed when their employment is practicable. Once
begun, the landing of nonscheduled serials can be
halted to permit landing on-call waves, floating
dump supplies, or selected supplies and equipment.
d. Floating dumps consist of emergency supplies
loaded in landing craft, amphibious vehicles, or pre-
loaded amphibious vehicles transported in landing;

116
ships. They provide a means of replenishing the
combat supplies of the assault units that went ashore
in the scheduled waves, or to provide specific items,
such as small-arms ammunition.
e. Landing force supplies are composed of replen
ishment supplies and consumable items to be landed
prior to general unloading. The supplies are landed
upon request of the landing force. Initially, this is
by means of selective unloading until the preplanned
levels of the various classes are established ashore.
130. Organization for Debarkation
a. For an assault landing, troops are formed into
boat teams. A boat team is a tactical grouping as
signed to a single boat for the movement from ship
to shore. It is commanded by the senior officer or
NCO in the team. The basic task organization of
landing craft is the boat group. This includes all
the boats assigned or attached to a single transport
for landing the troops embarked on it. The boat
group is commanded by a naval officer.
£>. The boat group is formed for landing in waves
of boats, each wave commanded by a naval officer or
noncommissioned officer. There may be from four to
seven waves in a boat group transporting the assault
elements of a battalion landing team. The amphib
ious control organization, through commanders and
their assistants, controls the movement of the sched
uled waves from the approach lane marker vessels
to the beach. Boats carrying nonscheduled serials
are not necessarily formed into waves, but it is con
venient to keep all craft of the same serial closed-up.
During general unloading of transports, landing

117
craft are loaded ami shuttled independently but
under the traffic direction of the control organization.
o. On board a transport, all troops are assigned
debarkation stations. These are locations at the rails
of the ship from which troops and equipment are
loaded into boats for the ship-to-shore movement.
131. Naval Control Organization
A control group is organized within the amphib
ious task force to control the ship-to-shore movement,
and to insure that troops, equipment, and supplies
are landed in accordance with landing force plans
and requirements. The naval control group is re
sponsible for the control of craft, amphibious ve
hicles, and ship traffic between the transport area
and the beach. It dispatches and guides the sched
uled waves in accordance with the landing plan, and
later dispatches troops, equipment, and supplies, in
response to the expressed needs of the landing force.
132. Tactical-Logistical Group
a. The Tactical-Logistical Group (Tac-Log
Group), composed of landing force personnel, is or
ganized to provide a means of quickty advising the
naval control officers of BLT and RCT requirements
during the ship-to-shore movement. The composi
tion of the Tac-Log Group varies with the .needs of
each operation, and there is no fixed organization.
Officers assigned to the group must have a thorough
knowledge of the tactical plan, the cargo carried by
the ships, and the plan of logistical support. Each
assault RCT has a Tac-Log Group on the primary
control vessel at the line of departure, and the divi-

118
sion Tac-Log Group is stationed aboard the central
control vessel.
&. Usually the Tac-Log Group is composed of rep
resentatives from the unit G3/S3 and GVS4 sections,
the embarkation officer, and various assistants. Rep
resentatives of other general and special staff sections,
and of artillery, air, medical, and amphibious ve
hicle units may also be included.
c. The second in command of each shore party
element goes to the appropriate control vessel and
sets up a radio set prior to the debarkation of any
troops. When the first shore party personnel get
ashore, they join a net composed of all shore party
radio stations. In this way, all shore party elements
are in communication with each other from the
beginning of the assault.
(I. Communication personnel of the Tac-Log Group
operate in radio nets prescribed in the division op
eration order. These usually include the regimental
tactical net, division shore party command net, and
division shore party lateral net.
e. The Tac-Log Group keeps records of the on-call
units and supplies which the RCT lias requested, and
of those which have been ordered to land. These
records help to insure that no requests are over
looked, and also show where requested supplies -are
located.
/. When general unloading commences, the naval
control organization for the assault period of the
ship-to-shore movement ceases to operate, but re
mains in a standby status, ready to resume unload
ing specifically requested items if required. Tac-
Log Group functions terminate at this time, and the
tactical members of the group are relieved. Certain
119
of the logistical members remain on board the con
trol vessels, however, continuing their functions
until the assault shipping has been unloaded.
g. During the unloading of follow-up shipping,
the shore party commander assumes more direct re
sponsibility for coordinating the landing force un
loading requirements with naval agencies, and in
supervising landing force personnel engaged in un
loading the ships.
133. Debarkation Procedure: Transports
a. Personnel.
(1) Upon approaching the transport area, the
ship debarkation officer announces a condi
tion of readiness for debarkation. All de
barkation stations are manned. Boat teams
assemble in troop compartments, so that the
crew can prepare the ship for debarkation.
(2) Upon arrival at a designated point in the
transport area, the ship stops to unload.
All boats, except those to be railloaded, are
lowered and proceed at once to the assigned
boat assembly area. This is within observa
tion distance of the transport, usually about
250 yards, so that they may be signalled
alongside for loading. The ship debarka
tion officer then calls the boats alongside for
loading in the sequence shown in the de
barkation schedule. (See figs. 10 and 11.)
(3) On receipt of the readiness signal, com
manders of teams scheduled to land in the
first trip of boats assemble their teams and
inspect each man. When called, the teams

120
 move to their assigned debarkation stations
and load into boats.
(4) Men and equipment to be loaded in the
second trip of boats debark in the order of
priority assigned in the debarkation sched
ule. Boat teams are called to report to their
designated debarkation stations as soon as
boats become available.

Figure 10. APA dlscUaryi'ng troops.

Vehicles.
(1) When a readiness condition is announced,
all drivers report to their vehicles to make
a final inspection while awaiting debarka
tion. Drivers remain with their vehicles in
the hold of the ship until the vehicle is moved
under the square of the hatch for hoisting.
They then embark into the landing craft
just before the vehicles are loaded, to in
sure proper loading.
(2) As far as possible, vehicles are loaded into
landing craft in the order in which they
121
 Figure 11. Loaded LGYP leaving transport.

122
 will be needed at the beach. Vehicles are
always loaded so that the front is toward
the bow of the landing craft. In order that
the landing: craft may ground close to the
water's edge, vehicles are placed as far
astern as possible and centered in the boat.
Insofar as practicable, vehicles without
their own power, such as trailers, are loaded
into the same boat as their prime movers.
In any case, trailers are loaded so that the
drawbar is toward the bow.
c. Heavy Equipment. When heavy equipment is
being loaded, the only personnel in the landing craft
during loading are those who guide the equipment
and who remove the loading slings. After the equip
ment has been loaded, the remainder of the boat team
debarks into the landing craft from the nearest de
barkation station.

134. Debarkation Procedure: Landing Ships

a. Thirty minutes before debarkation from an LST
or similar landing ship, the beaching alarm is
pounded. All drivers and assistant drivers report to
their vehicles and, unless the weather is too rough,
unlash the vehicles, warm up motors, and stand by
to debark. If sea conditions prohibit unlashing,
motors are warmed and drivers stand by to unlash
after beaching is accomplished.
l>. Other personnel who are to ride the vehicles
ashore move to their assigned vehicles and place
themselves as directed by the commanding officer of
troops. Remaining personnel stay in troop com
partments until all materiel is clear of the ship.

123
 c. After the ship has beached and the ramp is fully
lowered, debarkation begins, directed by the loading
officer and his assistants. When all vehicles are
clear of the ship, any remaining troops debark.

Section II. SHIP-TO-SHORE MOVEMENT,

135. Procedures
a. After the boats are loaded from the transport,
they move to a rendezvous area, about 500 to 1,500
yards from the transport in the direction of the line
of departure. Upon arrival in the rendezvous area,
they assemble into boat waves according to the land
ing diagram.
b. When the boat Avaves are assembled, they are
led in column of waves to the line of departure, which
is from 1,000 to 5,000 yards offshore, depending on
hydrographic conditions and the types of fire from
enemy defenses. On signal, the waves cross the line
of departure, boats abreast, and move toward the
beach. Succeeding waves of troops normally land
from three to twelve minutes after the preceding
wave. Nonscheduled waves usually land on orders
from the control officer.
c. The reconnaissance personnel of the BLT shore
parties land in the early waves. A liaison officer
usually rides in the same boat as the BLT commander.
136. Landing of Shore Party Elements
a. A typical sequence of events for establishing the
shore party ashore would be as follows:
(1) The reconnaissance party, including naval
beach party elements, of the BLT shore
party lands with the BLT making the ini-
124
 tial landing. The liaison officer accompanies
the BLT commander and relays requests
for the landing of additional BLT troops,
supplies, and equipment to the command
section of the shore party team established
on the beach. A wireman and a radio op
erator land with the liaison officer and es
tablish telephone and radio communication
with the reconnaissance party on the beach.
(2) Other high priority elements of the BLT
shore party are landed as directed or re
quested, in accordance with the landing
plan.
(3) The reconnaissance party reports the suit
ability of the BLT beach for unloading to
the RCT Tac-Log Group. Reconnaissance
personnel determine the nature of the tenta
tive dump sites, mark the limits of the beach,
select and clear beach exits, and establish
the means for relaying requests from the
liaison officer to the appropriate Tac-Log
Group. Communication with other shore
parties is established.
(4) The remaining elements of the BLT shore
party are landed, beach development is initi
ated, and unloading is commenced. When
the RCT shore party lands, the RCT shore
party commander consolidates the BLT
shore parties and coordinates shore party
activities with the RCT commander on the
beach.
(5) Shore parties with reserve BLT's normally
land with the BLT if a separate beach is to
be operated. Otherwise, they are used to
125
 reinforce the operating shore parties.
Similarly, shore parties embarked with a
reserve RCT either reinforce those operat
ing ashore or are assigned other missions,
such as construction in the beach area by
the shore battalion commander.
(6) Division beaches are consolidated by the
commander of the division shore party, upon
approval of the division commander.
5. The landing rate of shore party components is
geared to the buildup rate of the assault force. Only
a comparatively small portion of the shore party is
landed in scheduled waves. As the situation de
velops and the need for shore party support is indi
cated, additional shore party elements are landed on
call.

Section 111. BREACHING OPERATIONS

137. Types of Obstacles

a. On a tidal beach, the defender usually installs
a belt of obstacles extending several hundred yards
seaward from the high water mark, the distance de
pending upon the slope of the beach and the range of
the tide. These underwater obstacles are sited so as
to be just under water at high tide, and are covered
by fire from beach defense weapons. Unless the ob
stacles are neutralized, landing craft approaching the
beach at high tide are wrecked. At low tide, assault
troops must cross the barrier under heavy enemy
fire.
Z». Underwater obstacles that may be encountered
by the landing force (fig. 12) include—

126
 (1) Steel bars, logs, or timbers, set in the sea
floor or in concrete.
(2) The horned scully—a block of concrete with
projecting steel members which will rip the
hull of a boat.
(3) "Element C"—a sectional prefabricated
steel fence.
(4) Wire entanglements, including single
strand barbed wire fence, double apron
fence, net entanglements, trip-wire snares,
knife rests, and concertinas. AVire is usu
ally strung between all the underwater
obstacles.
(5) Concrete tetrahedrons.
(6) Rock-filled cribs.
(7) Log scaffolding.
(8) Mines.
(9) Combinations of any of the above.
c. Above the high tide level, beach obstacles are
installed. In addition to the types mentioned in 6
above, there may also be included—
(1) Antitank walls made of concrete, steel, logs,
revetted earth, or sand.
(2) Earthworks, such as ditches, craters, or
mounds of natural materials.
(3) Dragon's teeth, hedgehogs, eggs, and simi
lar obstacles made of concrete, steel, or both.
(4) Antitank ditches.
(5) Abatis constructed by felling trees or heavy
vegetation so that the branches and trunks
are intertwined.

127
ARBEO WIRE ANTI60AT OBSTACLES HIGH TIDE LINE

NOTE—FIXED AND FLOATING

MINES AT APPROPRIATE
DEPTHS OFF SHORE

Figure 12. Beach and underwater obstacles.

138. Breaching Plans
a. Naval personnel are primarily responsible for
breaching and clearance of obstacles located under
water. Beach obstacles located above the high water
line are breached and cleared by the landing force.
In planning, agreement is reached between landing
force and naval commanders as to the responsibility
for clearing obstacles lying within the tidal range,
particularly those exposed at the time of landing.
It is a task which should be controlled by a single
commander during the assault.
• &. Sites for the necessary number of cleared lanes
are selected in the early planning stages. The selec
tion of lanes to be cleared depends upon the require
ments for the use of vehicles, and the accessibility
of beach exits. A means of designating and identi
fying areas to be cleared initially is established,
using either existing landmarks or smoke projectiles.
The breaching plan is included in the landing force
operation order, usually as an appendix to the engi
neer annex.
139. Prelanding Reduction Measures
a. Before troops are landed, maximum use is made
of aerial and naval bombardment, remote placement
demolition devices, and clandestine operations ashore
to reduce obstacles. Air Force and Navy units pre
cede the task force and continue the softening-up
process until the time of the assault landing. Pre
determined lane sites are bombarded, including
dummy lanes for deception purposes. The preland-
ing bombardment may cause extensive cratering,
which must be considered when planning beach
operations.
305640—54———9 129
 &. Underwater demolition units and teams are
Navy organizations under the direct control of
the commander, amphibious force. They perform
highly specialized preassault reconnaissance and
demolition duties before the landing, including di
versionary demolitions on selected beaches, and the
removal of obstacles on the assault beaches. On
D-day they often act as guides on assault control
boats, and after the landing they assist in clearing
underwater debris, blasting channels, trimming reef
edges, and similar tasks.
140. Breaching Teams
a. Regardless of the effectiveness of prelanding
measures, obstacle clearing teams are usually re
quired to clear lanes through the beach obstacle
barrier. These teams are normally provided by com
bat engineer units. If obstacles are not extensive,
personnel from the shore platoons may be employed
to clear lanes.
6. The composition and equipment of the obstacle-
clearing teams will depend upon the specific tasks to
be performed, considering—
(1) Type of obstacles to be cleared.
(2) Width of initial lanes required.
(3) Time available for clearing operations.
(4) Difficulties involved in landing equipment
for breaching.
c. The team for breaching a single lane across the
beach usually consists of from twenty to forty men,
including engineer demolition specialists and rein
forcing elements, such as tank dozers. The organiza
tion for clearing lanes across a single ECT beach
includes a breaching team for each lane, and a com-
130
mand team composed of command and communica
tions personnel to coordinate all breaching elements
on that beach. The entire organization is termed a
breaching group.
d. Usually a reconnaissance man from the breach
ing team lands with an early wave, to locate the lane
sites. The teams land with or immediately after the
leading waves of infantry. In addition to the cov
ering fire of infantry units, the teams receive air,
naval, and LVT(A) fire support. If practicable,
smoke is used to screen their operations. Coordina
tion with naval underwater demolition teams is essen
tial, so that all clearance efforts from the three-
fathom line across the beach are directed efficiently.
e. The initial mission of each team is to clear and
mark a lane of minimum width, removing all mines
and obstacles that would hinder tactical vehicles.
Generally, a width of 18 to 24 feet is sufficient, if the
lanes are well marked and guides are used. As soon
as the obstacle barrier is penetrated, the lanes are
widened. Secondary missions include the clearance
of all mines, dud bombs, unexploded shells, and ob
stacles that would hinder operations in the beach area
or the construction of exit roads. Upon completing
their assigned missions, the teams report to the shore
party commander for other beach development tasks.
If they are not attached to the shore party, they re
vert to their parent unit for further assignment.
/. Techniques of obstacle clearance are described
in TM 5-220.

131
 CHAPTER 9

BEACH OPERATIONS

Section I. INITIAL ACTIONS ASHORE

141. General
a. Shore party operations ashore begin when per
sonnel of the reinforced shore platoons land to con
duct an initial reconnaissance of the beach area, and
to coordinate the earliest preparation of the beach.
Subsequently, the reinforced shore companies land
with priority equipment to organize the beach. Con
trol is centralized in progressively higher shore party
echelons as rapidly as the tactical situation permits.
While actual operation of the beaches is accomplished
by the shore parties of each echelon, the commander
of the highest landing force unit on shore is respon
sible for the control and operation of the beach areas.
b. The establishment and operation of shore
parties ashore normally takes place in four phases—
(1) The initial infantry units land, accompanied
by elements of their shore parties.
(2) The reinforced shore platoons land on BLT
(numbered) beaches and establish an area
of operations; movement of units, equip
ment, and supplies to the shore begins.
(3) The shore platoons and companies are con
solidated and control is assumed by the shore
battalion headquarters.
(4) The amphibious support regimental head
quarters assumes control of shore party op
erations and a division beach support area
132
 is established. The same sequence is fol
lowed for consolidation under control of the
amphibious support brigade in a corps
landing.
142. Shore Company Functions
a. The reinforced shore platoon is normally re
sponsible for a numbered (BLT) beach. It is the
first shore party unit to commence beach organiza
tion. The first elements ashore include a reconnais
sance party, communication section, and liaison
section, with the following general duties—
(1) The reconnaissance party reconnoiters the
beach area to verify the location of planned
installations, erects markers, relays requests
for supplies from the liaison officer with the
BLT commander to the RCT Tac-Log
Group, submits reports to the Tac-Log
Group and to division headquarters regard
ing the suitability of the beach for unload
ing and movement inland of supplies and
equipment.
(2) Communication personnel maintain com
munication with the liaison officer at the
BLT command post and with the Tac-Log
Group aboard the primary control vessel.
(3) The liaison section establishes wire and
radio communication between the reconnais
sance party and the BLT command post,
transmits the BLT commander's requests for
supplies, and reports to the Tac-Log Group
any developments in the tactical situation
which may influence the time of landing of
the remainder of the shore party. The liai-
133
 son section consists of a liaison officer, a
radio operator, and a wireman. Liaison
personnel usually come from battalion head
quarters or from a unit attached to the bat
talion. They are selected when the shore
party is first activated, and train with the
BLT, to insure familiarity with BLT per
sonnel and policies.
b. The command section of the shore company
maintains a continuing record of the units, supplies,
and equipment landed on the beach; provides an in
formation center to orient troop leaders arriving on
the beach after the scheduled elements of the RCT
have landed, provides guides, if required, to conduct
personnel to forward or adjacent areas; establishes
markers to indicate unloading points and beach
dumps.
c. Shore platoons construct beach roadways and
prisoner-of-war stockades, clear and prepare dump
areas, assist in the landing of vehicles, operate cranes
and tractors for unloading landing craft, decontam
inate gassed areas, assist in the camouflage of beach
dumps and other beach installations, perform demoli
tions in the beach area, and assist in the salvage of
landing craft. Aided by personnel from the service
units, the platoons also unload supplies from landing
craft, landing ships, and amphibious vehicles, and
assemble the supplies in designated beach dumps.
With help from other engineer units, the platoons
are responsible for removing or reducing minefields
on the beach, in the traffic circuits, and in areas in
tended for dumps and other installations.

134
143. Reconnaissance
a. The reconnaissance party lands before the re
mainder of its shore party. It submits reports to
the shore party headquarters afloat regarding the
suitability of previously selected sites for unloading
points, beach exits, roads, and beach dumps; soil
trafficability of the beach and immediate exits; and
other terrain features which have an influence on
shore party operations. Beach party reconnaissance
personnel reconnoiter the sea approaches to the beach
and determine any hazards of navigation.
6. The shore platoon leader verifies the recom
mendations of the reconnaissance party, and locates
the beach identification markers, landing points,
beach exits, roads, and other initial installations.
Any necessary changes or adjustments are made in
the original beach organization plan to fit the actual
terrain. Naval demolition teams neutralize or re
move underwater obstacles located by their recon
naissance personnel.
o. When the shore company commander lands, he
confers with the shore platoon leaders ashore, mak
ing any changes required to meet the current situa
tion. This procedure is repeated by each higher
shore party commander arriving at the beach.
d. Engineering reconnaissance is continuous, and
the principles prescribed for ground operations are
followed by all shore engineer units. After the ini
tial missions are accomplished, reconnaissance will
be conducted to locate sources of water supply, or to
confirm the adequacy of predetermined sources, and
to locate engineer materials for road construction
and for beach installations.

135
144. Preparation of Beach
a. As specific locations for shore party installations
are decided upon by the platoon leader, headquarters
personnel erect markers indicating the center and
flanks of the beach, and the unloading points (fig.
13). A command post is established, and communi
cation is opened with the supported BLT, RCT Tac-
Log Group, the appropriate control officer, and unit
loading officers on the shipping in which the sup
ported BLT was embarked.
"b. Attached naval elements deploy their personnel
and equipment so that the landing and retraction
of landing craft can be controlled. Communications
are established and arrangements are made for the
emergency salvage and repair of landing craft.
c. Unloading points and initial beach dumps are a
first priority. Dumps must be ready to receive sup
plies in an orderly manner. If they are not pre
pared promptly, the beach will soon become cluttered
with unsorted supplies and equipment. The com
mander of troops on each assault vessel is concerned
primarily with his tactical mission ashore. His re
sponsibility ends when he has prepared the necessary
tables, assigned the required embarkation personnel,
completed loading his equipment on the craft or ship,
and has had his loading approved by the ship's com
manding officer. He is also responsible for getting
his personnel and mobile equipment ashore and in
land from landing craft. This includes handling
stalled vehicles, although emergency assistance and
heavy towing service will be provided by the shore
party. All other unloading tasks on the far shore
are the responsibility of the shore party.
136
 d. Division or corps engineers attached to the shore
party for initial beach operations usually revert to
the control of their parent organization by D plus 1.
They may be employed to assist in breaching lanes
through beach obstacles and minefields, clearing
mines and other obstacles throughout the beach sup
port area, clearing sites for beach dumps and other
facilities, constructing and maintaining roads and
unloading slots, or reinforcing local security groups.
145. Initial Supply Procedure
a. When the first assault units land, they carry
with them only a limited quantity of rations, water,
and ammunition for individual weapons. To pro
vide an assault BLT with an emergency reserve of
critical items (ammunition, water, rations, flame
thrower fuel), amphibious vehicles may be as
signed to each BLT as a floating dump. They re
main in position near the primary control vessel,
and are landed on order of the battalion commander.
Similar floating dumps, employing amphibious ve
hicles, landing ships, or landing craft, are organized
to provide an early emergency means of supply for
the EOT. Instructions concerning floating dumps
are usually contained in the logistical annex to the
division operations order or in the division adminis
trative order.
&. If supplies are needed, the BLT commander
notifies the liaison officer of the shore platoon, who
forwards the request to the reconnaissance party on
the beach, which in turn notifies the EOT Tac-Log
Group. The Tac-Log Group then determines where
the supplies can be obtained, and passes the request

137
 ilACH MARKERS
(SMADID PORTION-BEACH COLOR)

CEMTEK RIGHT
DAY

BEACH RED-]
(FROM SEAWARD) (FROM SEAWARD)

OEBARKATIOM POIHT MARKER!

WHEELED TRACKED
VEHICLES WATER FtL VEHICLES

DAY

MIGHT

ILIHKINO
M
Fiyure 13. Beuvh and debarkation point markers.
to the primary control officer. If the supplies are in
the floating dumps, the control officer orders the ap
propriate boat or amphibious vehicle to the beach
for unloading. The shore party commander is in
formed of the action taken.
c. When the landing craft arrives at the beach, it
is unloaded by the shore party and returns to the
primary control vessel. Nonessential items are re
moved from amphibious vehicles and placed in beach
dumps before the vehicles proceed inland and un
load the requested supplies. After unloading, the
vehicles return to the beach support area and come
under the control of the shore party headquarters
for further employment.
d. If the requested supplies are not in floating
dumps, the Tac-Log Group informs the primary
control officer as to the ship in which they are loaded.
The control officer forwards a request to have the
supplies placed in landing craft, which then report
to the primary control vessel for dispatch to the
beach. This is termed selective lunloadmg.
e. After the ROT headquarters has landed, the
BLT commander requests supplies from the EOT,
which directs the ROT Tac-Log Group to have them
sent ashore. At the same time, the ROT notifies the
shore party commander of the action taken.
/. As soon as the shore party is capable of un
loading more supplies than are being requested by
the units ashore, the shore party commander requests
that additional supplies be landed. The remainder
of the floating dump supplies are then unloaded and
placed in beach dumps. Additional supplies em
barked in ships are landed, and the beach dumps are
gradually expanded so that all requests can be filled.
139
 (Figs. 14, 15, and 16 illustrate beach operations.)
When distances are short from the beach to the com
bat troops, service troops of the assault units may
be available to help the shore party. Units then
draw their supplies directly from the beach dumps.
g. When the shore company headquarters is es
tablished ashore, it assumes control of the BLT
beaches and the shore company commander usually
recommends to the division shore party commander
that general unloading begin (see pars. 164 through
172).
Ji. The EOT commander assumes responsibility
for supply when he has sufficient service troops and
equipment ashore to commence executing the plan of
supply. Initially, the ECT distributing points are
the beach dumps. As the attacking forces advance,
the ECT establishes distributing points inland and
ceases to operate from the beach dumps as soon as
the supplies in these dumps have been issued. If
the division service troops are ashore and the divi
sion commander assumes supply responsibility, the
ECT operates according to the supply instructions
contained in the division order.
i. The shore party commander is responsible for
building up supplies ashore initially in accordance
with the supply levels prescribed by the division com
mander. This buildup cannot begin until the beach
dumps are ready to receive supplies and equipment.
When the supplies from floating dumps are unloaded,
those not issued to assault units to fulfill their re
quests are placed in the appropriate beach dumps.
The shore party commander then determines the
types and quantities of supplies needed to reach the

140
Figure 14. Beach operations: Leyte, P. I.

Figure 15. Beach operations: Iwo Jima.

141
Figure IS. Bench operations: Wolmi-Do, Inchon, Korea.
prescribed D-day levels, and notifies the Tac-Log
Group of his requirements.

Section II. BEACH SUPPORT AREA

146. General
a. After the most essential beach facilities have
been provided, the shore battalion commander pro
ceeds to organize the beach progressively according
to plan. In a multiple-beach landing, one beach will
probably be selected for complete development into
a beach support area for the landing force.
t>. The beach support area is the developed portion
of the beach which provides a base for logistical
operations. It may be divided into zones of action,
and each zone assigned to a reinforced shore com
pany. One boundary between the zones may corre
spond with the line dividing the LST unloading
points from the landing craft unloading points. The
beach is usually divided to give the best area for
unloading to the LST's; next best, to the LSM's;
next, LCU's, then LCM's. The DUKW's come in
at a poorer part of the beach. Separate unload
ing points are established for tracked vehicles, and
for unloading medical supplies and evacuating
casualties.
c. Each shore company commander is responsible
for all shore party activities within his zone until
the division shore party headquarters assumes con
trol of operations. At first, battalion operations are
decentralized, then come under the control of the
amphibious support regiment, and finally of the
amphibious support brigade, as each higher head
quarters is established ashore.
143
Figure 17. Schematic plan for organization of a RCT teach
support area.

d. Instead of zone assignments, the shore com

panies may be given responsibility for particular
functions. For example, one company may be as
signed to handle beach operations, one made respon
sible for dump activities, and another employed on
area construction and improvement.
e. The beach area required for efficient shore party
operations varies. A division shore party will need
about a square mile of area initially for temporary
dumps, with at least 1,000 yards of beach frontage.
The requirements cannot be firmly stated, however,
since they will be determined by the type of beach,
144
Figure 18. Schematic plan for organization of a BLT beach
support area.

the tactical situation, and the service and storage area

necessary. The size of the beach support area must
also be limited to an area that can be defended by
available manpower against an enemy attack or
counterlanding. The bulk of supplies stored in the
beach support area consists of combustible explo
sives such as ammunition and POL, which require
dispersion. Particularly wide dispersion is neces-

305640—54- -10 145

 sary if the enemy has strong air or atomic capabili
ties. (Figs. 17 and 18 illustrate beach support areas.)
/. From the beginning of the attack to the end of
the operation, the primary objective of all concerned,
both engineers and assault troops, is to keep the beach
clear. Congestion must be avoided, and lateral move
ment is limited, usually along specified one-way
roads. All efforts of the shore party are directed to
ward obtaining a proper rate of unloading, to provide
effective support for the landing force, and to permit
a quick discharge of shipping.
g. Emergencies will arise that demand the com
plete cooperation and maximum effort of everyone
working on the beach, regardless of branch, service,
or primary duty. Army personnel must be ready
and willing to assist the Navy in retracting boats,
removing underwater obstacles, and performing
other normally Navy functions. Similarly, Navy
personnel must be available for emergency employ
ment on tasks usually performed by the Army.
147. Records and Reports
a. Each shore party headquarters must maintain
simple but complete records of the supplies and
equipment received, and the personnel evacuated.
These form the basis of periodic and informal reports
to higher headquarters. The requirements will vary
for each operation, but the following records may be
considered typical—
(1) Continuing inventories of the contents of
various dumps.
(2) Inventory of landing ships unloaded, in
cluding the serial number of the ship, time
of beaching, percentage unloaded at two-
146
 hour intervals, and time ship is fully
unloaded.
(3) Records of the supplies, equipment, and
units that have crossed the beach. This is
facilitated by the use of cargo tickets. When
the landing craft operator receives cargo at
the transport, he is given a cargo ticket in
triplicate which lists the contents of his
load. En route to the beach, he stops at the
appropriate control vessel and gives the
Tac-Log Group one copy of the ticket; when
the landing craft arrives at the unloading
slot, he gives two copies to the shore party
representative, who forwards one to shore
party headquarters. The remaining copy
accompanies the load to the dump.
(4) Number of casualties evacuated.
(5) Data concerning personnel killed in action,
and where buried.
(6) Number of prisoners of war being held and
number evacuated.
(7) Stragglers in custody, and stragglers turned
over to other agencies.
6. At each command post, the following situation
maps should be maintained:
(1) Map showing the disposition of troops
within the shore party area of operations,
including the command post locations, and
the locations of other important installa
tions.
(2) Large-scale map showing the locations of
beach dumps, shore party command posts,
shore party maintenance installations, shore
party bivouac areas, beach traffic circulation,
147
 beach area security dispositions, and other
information detailing the organization of
the beach support area.
(3) Tactical situation map.
148. Priorities of Beach Organization
a. In organizing the beach support area, tasks are
performed in the following general priority:
(1) Roads, exit and lateral.
(2) Information center.
(3) Command post.
(4) Vehicle assembly area (dewaterproofingand
emergency maintenance).
(5) Evacuation station.
(6) Communications center.
(7) PW evacuation.
(8) Water points.
(9) Bivouacs and vehicle parks.
(10) Perimeter defense.
(11) Beach assignment of landing craft.
(12) Temporary dumps.
(13) Perimeter road.
&. Many of these activities are performed simul
taneously, and not necessarily in the sequence indi
cated. Installations established and operated
initially by the shore party, such as dumps and PW
enclosures, are later taken over by other units as
the beach support area is consolidated.
149. Roads
a. Beach exit roads leading from the surf line to
solid terrain must be pioneered before heavy vehicles
are landed. They furnish an avenue of exit for
vehicles to roads, to cover or concealment, or to open,
148
country across which vehicles can disperse. If pos
sible, beach exits connect with the existing road net.
In cutting exits for beach roads through banks, at
least three feet clearance on both side of the road
must be provided, to prevent the loose sides from
crumbling and blocking the road. A further cut to
permit foot traffic off the road is also desirable.
Eoads should have a minimum of slope, even if turns
must be made. On a steep slope, heavy vehicles tend
to pull the matting under them.
&. Lateral roads are needed to connect all unload
ing points, and in the rear of beaches. As soon as
possible, a two-way lateral road should be constructed
to the adjacent beaches. This will provide for the
movement of supplies that may be unloaded at the
wrong beach.
c. The road net in each BLT area should provide
at least two roads leading from the beach to the
dumps, and a road returning to the beach. Koads
leading from the water must start at the low-water
mark. An apron at least 40 feet wide should be
provided at the water end of the road, so that landing
craft do not have to hit the beach entrance with
absolute accuracy at every beaching.
d. A reinforced division landing force has more
than 4,000 vehicles, a proportion of one vehicle for
every four or five individuals. Adequate roads
rarely exist in a landing area for this number of
vehicles. Eoads must be built over loose sand,
marsh, and soft ground to carry all types of vehicles
and a heavy flow of traffic. To reduce maintenance
problems, a 'road should be as smooth and evenly
graded as possible. This may be done initially, after
cutting exits and rough levelling, by back-blading
149
(driving the bulldozer in reverse over the road, with
the blade trailing the surface).
e. Temporary routes are laid out in accordance
with plans for future base development; consistent
with the tactical requirements of the landing force.
150. Surfacing Materials
a. Any material used for surfacing beach roads or
landing points must be light, simple to lay, and not
bulky. Metal-track surfaces can be laid rapidly and
easily, with a minimum of equipment, and do not
require highly-trained specialists to install them.
Suitable materials include pierced-steel and pierced-
aluminum planks, and landing mats. Pierced-steel
plank is customarily laid upside down. This gives
a roughened surface for traction, and results in less
buckling. Metal planks may be used for a heavy-
duty road over muddy or swampy ground if a double
layer is employed, and the subgrade is carefully
prepared and drained.
6. Mats have a number of disadvantages. They
are easily damaged by tracked vehicles, such as tanks
and bulldozers, to the extent that they cannot be sal
vaged and reused. The surface becomes slippery
when wet. Constant maintenance is required. Ve
hicles must travel at slow speeds, and some types of
matting tend to billow in front of the vehicle. Dur
ing heavy rains, surface water washes out the subsoil
under the surfacing.
c. Several types of portable metal surfaces are
available for road construction. In addition to the
metal landing mats, the most practical are square-
mesh track (SMT), wire mesh, and chain-link fenc
ing. SMT and various types of wire mesh should
ISO
not be used on muddy roads. They prevent grading
and reshaping of the subgrade when ruts appear.
Burlap or hessian placed under the mat makes a
firmer surface, and may be attached to the mats
beforehand. These materials distribute the load
from under the wheel, prevent the wire from sinking
into the ground, and add greatly to the life of the
i'oad. Care must be taken not to lay mats over a hole
or curved depression, since the mat will shape itself
to the ground beneath it.
d. SMT can be rolled out rapidly to provide ex
pedient roads over sandy beaches, dune sand, or sim
ilar ground. It has a tendency to billow in front of a
fast-moving vehicle, but this can be alleviated by
crimping or straining the wires after the track is
laid. Sandwich type construction can also be used.
e. Somerfeld track, while not a standard item of
issue, may be available from theater sources in an
amphibious operation. It is a light and easily laid
track, suitable for beach roads, made of prefabricated
matting and steel bearing rods. Flexible duckboards
(3x9 feet) are used with the track when the road is
laid over bad ground, loose gravel, or beach sand. It
is laid end to end, and secured with ordinary pickets.
For soft beaches or under water, a Somerfeld sand
wich is prepared. This is made by inclosing the flexi
ble duckboards between two layers of the track . The
upper layer enables the tires to grip, while the lower
layer prevents the duckboards from sinking into the
sand or mud. Instead of the duckboards, prefabri
cated bituminous surfacing, burlap, or corduroy may
be placed under the track to increase its bearing
capacity.

1ST
 /. (1) Chain-link mesh, ordinary chicken wire,
expanded metal lath, chespaling (small sap
lings laid side by side and wired together),
and bamboo mats are among the expedient
materials that may be used for beach road
ways, as well as the usual planks, fascines,
corduroy, and logs. These are strictly ex
pedients, applied directly to the subgrade
to provide a surface that will carry a limited
number of vehicles for a short time. Other
roads should not be allowed to cross a wire-
mesh road unless planks or similar materials
are placed over the mesh to protect it.
Sandwich-type construction will provide a
more durable surface.
(2) Since chain-link wire mesh usually comes
in a width of from six to eight feet, it is
necessary to lay at least two sections to ob
tain a roadway wide enough for traffic. If
chicken wire three feet wide is used, the
roadway should be laid with five widths, in
one-foot overlaps, and fastened together
with plain wire. One layer of chicken wire
will be sufficient temporarily for light traffic,
but three layers are needed to sustain trucks
for even a short time, compared to a single
layer of heavy chain-link wire mesh.
Chicken wire is difficult to make secure, and
is liable to tear or give, often getting en
tangled in the undercarriage of vehicles.
The edges should be weighted down with
sandbags or buried pins, to prevent curling.
(3) Prefabricated bituminous surfacing (PBS)
has 110 structural strength and provides only
152
 a temporary wearing surface. During land
ing operations on firm, sandy beaches, satis
factory temporary roads may be made by
laying PBS after preliminary grading or
dragging. Unless the sand is stabilized or
has additional surfacing material placed on
it, however, PBS will not last more than
two or three days under ordinary usage.
g. Soil stabilization chemicals may be available
from class IV supply sources in a sufficient quantity
to provide road surfaces in a portion of the beach sup
port area. Mixed with beach sand, these additives
create a firm surface that wears well under normal
traffic. If the use of soil stabilization materials is
anticipated, specialists must be trained in the use
of equipment and the proper application of the
chemicals.
h. In the early stages of the landing, beach sur
faces may have to be improved rapidly, using sand
bags or such natural materials as palm leaves, brush,
or driftwood. Beach sand will often provide a sat
isfactory surface for traffic, if it is kept moist by
the use of sprinklers, or frequently hosed. Quick
and accurate judgment of surfaces, and the ability to
improvise, are essential qualities of the shore party
engineer.
151. Traffic Control
a. Traffic control in the beach support area is han
dled by the military police, who work closely with
personnel of the information center, and with the
headquarters of the shore party. Initially, all mili
tary police traffic control activities are directed by
the shore company commander in his zone. When
153
beach consolidation reaches a point where overall
traffic control is desirable, the military police revert
to the control of their unit commander, and operate
directly from division shore party headquarters.
Military police are kept informed of the locations of
command posts and installations, and of the situa
tion, so that they can provide information service at
the traffic control posts.
b. Troops and mobile equipment not belonging to
the shore party must move out of the beach support
area without delay. There is a tendency for the
transportation of headquarters units, artillery, and
trains to assemble on the beach until their command
ers have completed forward reconnaissance. Military
police must keep vehicles moving out of the beach
support area, and keep sites selected for shore party
installations free from other troops and vehicles.
c. In the first phases of beach operation, most of
the traffic is one-way inland and one-way return.
Gradually, the amount of supply traffic and return
ing empty vehicles increases. When the majority of
combat troops have advanced inland, traffic circula
tion plans are put into effect and rigidly enforced.
Traffic is kept moving and dispersed as much as the
terrain and road net permit. The best and shortest
routes from the beach to supply dumps are assigned
to loaded DUKW's and trucks. Eeturning empty
vehicles are routed over alternate roads, even if those
roads are longer. Cross-traffic is held to a minimum.
If possible, roads leading to dumps should not cross
the main supply route.
d. Each beach exit has a DUKW or truck control
station where cargoes and destinations are verified,
and drivers are instructed on the route to follow. On
154
returning, each driver reports to a vehicle assembly
area for his next mission. New drivers are given a
simplified sketch to show the route from beach to
dump and return.
e. Signs are erected by the shore party for each
supply point, command post, and other installation
under shore party control, as well as to mark routes,
beach exits, and the directions to tactical units. It
is particularly important to post selected routes to
areas provided for the assembly of- transient units.
In the early stages of the operation, when large num
bers of men and vehicles, and hundreds of tons of
supplies, are coming ashore, the proper placement of
signs is essential to relieve congestion on the beach.
152. Vehicle Assembly Areas
a. Vehicle assembly areas are established close to
beach exit roads, near the beach, but far enough in
land so that beach activities are not hampered. If
necessary, suitable terrain is cleared and levelled by
the shore party for this purpose, and hardstands are
provided by the use of expedient surfacing materials.
&. At the beach assembly areas, dewaterproofing
facilities are established, where vehicles coming
through the surf can be checked before proceeding
inland. Only the minimum of maintenance and de-
waterproofing is performed, to enable the vehicle to
proceed to its unit assembly area. Complete dewater
proofing must be done beyond the beach area, to avoid
congestion.
153. Salvage and Emergency Maintenance
a. Tractors and personnel from the equipment-re
pair platoons assist vehicles through the surf and
155
soft sand (fig. 19). When LSM's and LST's ground
with their bow ramps in deep water, several of the
vehicles aboard are connected in tandem, and towed
off with a waterproofed tractor.
&. Equipment and vehicle repairmen from H&S
company may be attached to the shore companies to
perform emergency repairs and maintenance on
stalled vehicles during the early stages of the land
ing. Priority is given to equipment and vehicles
which can be returned to use most quickly, and are
most essential to current activities. Salvage and
maintenance must be performed rapidly, and must
not be allowed to interfere with the unloading.
c. The division shore party commander establishes
a salvage collecting point on the beach for abandoned
and reclaimable equipment. Enemy equipment of
possible future usefulness is also assembled at this
point.
d. The beach support area is likely to be cluttered
with debris caused by the prelanding bombardment.
Some shore party personnel may have to be diverted
to clear up the beach. Stragglers or prisoners of war
may be formed into working parties to remove debris
that is interfering with beach operations.
e. The recovery of life jackets discarded on the
beach is given a high priority. Collecting details are
formed, and assigned DUKW's, if available, for this
mission.
154. Information Center
a. The information center is centrally located,
preferably near the water's edge, at the entrance of
a main beach exit road. It must be marked by a large,
conspicuous sign. Initially, the information center
156
Figure 19. Tractor towing 105-mm howitzer from LCM.
 may be located at the command post of a shore pla
toon or company. The center is manned by personnel
from the operations section of battalion headquarters
and the attached military police. When the head
quarters of the division shore party is opened ashore,
information centers are directed by the regimental
intelligence officer, and operated by the military
police.
&. Information is provided concerning traffic con
ditions, and the location of units, dumps, and supply
points in the beach area. Data concerning the situa
tion on adjoining beaches, as well as the forward
tactical situation, is secured and kept up-to-date. A
corrected copy of the beach support area layout is
maintained, and a situation map is kept current with
information about the tactical situation, and the lo
cation of units and command posts.
c. For the convenience of observers and official vis
itors, the information center should be prepared to
provide maps, overlays, traffic plans, unit area lay
outs, and similar material. They may be reproduced
before the operation. It is desirable to have liaison
officers and guides available, to insure that visitors
are properly briefed Avithout interrupting the work
of shore party personnel.
155. Command Post
a. The shore party command post should be cen
trally located, fairly close to the information center.
The adjutant, assisted by the communications officer
and the headquarters commandant, directs the in
terior arrangement of the CP, designating the space
to be occupied by the shore party commander and by
each staff section.
158
 b. The headquarters commandant is responsible
for the local security and defense of the command
post, including its camouflage and concealment.
Standing operating procedure normally sets up a
defense system to be followed in normal situations.
As soon as possible, the CP is dug in and sheltered,
and individual foxholes are dug.
c. The message center is located at the natural en
trance to the CP, where incoming messengers can
find it easily, and outgoing messengers can be dis
patched conveniently. Radio stations are located as
near the message center as the sites for best reception
and transmission will permit. The switchboard is
placed near incoming wire circuits, away from noise
and interference.
156. Medical Service
a. The evacuation station is organized and func
tions as follows—
(1) A. liaison man from the shore party medical
detachment comes ashore with the BLT
medical section. When the shore party com
pany headquarters lands, medical personnel
establish an evacuation station on the beach.
This should be located near a road used by
vehicles returning to the beach, taking the
maximum advantage of natural protection,
and allowing dispersion. At this time, the
BLT medical personnel, who have handled
casualties previously, are relieved, and dis
place forward to the BLT aid station. All
casualties are then evacuated from the BLT
aid station to the beach evacuation station,
which also handles shore party casualties.
159
 (2) At the evacuation station, casualties are
sorted and tagged. Those with minor
wounds and injuries are treated and re
turned to their units. Casualties requiring
any degree of hospitalization are evacuated
by amphibious vehicles, or landing craft,
or by helicopters to the evacuation control
ship (LST (H)), where they are treated,
sorted, and evacuated by small boats to the
casualty carrying ship (APA, APH, AH)
designated to receive that particular type
of casualty. If helicopters are used for
evacuation, shore engineers must clear and
prepare suitable heliports in the beach sup
port area.
(3) When the division shore party headquarters
is ashore, the shore evacuation stations may
be consolidated into a single station. If
this is impracticable, the shore party com
mander coordinates the function of the sta
tions and consolidates their reports. After
the division clearing and collecting stations
are in operation, the flow of casualties is
through them, following normal ground
operations procedure.
6. The shore party medical section has the follow-
. ing specific duties:
(1) Organizes and coordinates the Army medi
cal service on the beach.
(2) Receives, sorts, classifies, temporarily cares
for, and retains control of all casualties
arriving at the beach. Casualties are
turned over to the Navy evacuation station
only as fast as the Navy can transport
160
 them. The chief aim of the section at this
time is to prepare as many patients as pos
sible for evacuation to the ships in the short
est period of time. This service consists of
resuscitation, treatment of shock, control of
hemorrhage, reapplication of splints and
dressings, and simple surgical procedures
required as emergency life-saving measures.
(3) Provides shelter, such as tent flies, for the
protection of casualties against exposure
and inclement weather, as well as slit
trenches and foxholes for security. When
available, abandoned enemy installations
are utilized.
(4) Establishes and operates a medical supply
point; collects all remaining litters, blank
ets, medical supplies and equipment pre
viously dropped on the beach.
(5) Establishes liaison with other Army medi
cal units on or near the beach.
(6) Assists in forwarding messages and sup-,
plies to medical units inland.
(7) Cooperates closely with the Navy medical
embarkation officer on the beach.
(8) Assembles casualties, ready for evacuation
to ships, at a location designated by the
shore party commander. This location
should consider the suitable landing points,
cover from enemy fire, and the natural lines
of drift to medical installations. Ordi
narily only one loading station, marked
with a Red Cross, will be at each BLT
beach.

305640—54———11 161
 (9) Kigidly controls walking wounded, segre
gating them, and preventing them from in
terfering with beach activities.
(10) Furnishes one or more men with burial
parties to record essential data concerning
the dead. This includes the name, rank,
organization, service number; cause, time
and place of death; name and address of
nearest relative. Data is recorded and re
ports submitted in accordance with the pro
visions of FM 10-63. Collecting points
for personnel killed in action are established
by the shore party commander, and oper
ated by attached graves registration teams.
(11) Maintains a record of all casualties re
ceived, and submits reports of casualties to
the shore party commander at prescribed
intervals as directed.
c. Provisions are made for exchanging items of
property which accompany an evacuee, so that a
shortage will not impair the efficiency of shore evac
uation. Such property as litters, blankets, and
splints are exchanged with the evacuation agencies in
•the combat area, and with landing craft and ships
taking part in evacuation.
d. Since the evacuation station is the last source
of information concerning casualties leaving the
division during the early period of an operation, it
is important that a complete and legible emergency
medical tag be attached to each casualty, and an
entry made in the field casualty log. Reports on
casualties evacuated are submitted as required by
shore party headquarters. Consolidated records are
submitted to division headquarters before the eyacu-
162
at ion stations are dissolved, or at the end of each
24-hour period.
e. Slightly injured, sick, or wounded personnel
may be retained in the beach aid stations for periods
of 48 hours or less, if they can be returned to duty
within that time.
/. The naval beach party medical section estab
lishes an evacuation station which provides tempo
rary facilities for treating casualties awaiting trans
portation to the receiving vessels, and for giving
emergency treatment to beach casualties. The shore
party medical officer is kept informed of the rate
that casualties can be evacuated to ships, so as to
maintain the maximum flow of casualties seaward
without causing congestion at the beach evacuation
station.
157. Communications
a. An efficient beach communication system is es
sential to direct unloading, for the efficient movement
of supplies and equipment to beach dumps, and for
other shore party functions which depend upon cen
tral control and the exchange of information (fig.
20). Facilities must be provided for—
(1) Communications with supported BLT's and
KCT's.
(2) Visual, sound, and radio communication for
beach operations, traffic control, and sal
vage operations.
(3) Communication with the Tac-Log Group
and individual ships.
(4) Communication laterally between beaches.
(5) Local wire and messenger service within
the beach area.
163
 (6) A listening watch on the local air warning
net.
(7) Broadcast of warning signals.
(8) A local radio net, using hand-pack equip
ment, for continuous contact between the
beachmaster and the communication center.
(9) Communication to the commander of the
next higher echelon.
(10) Communicati on for beach defense.

/1
rnh-"
'—x
PRC\
10 J
——VH
([ m*-./

11 n
I ml6-'

Figure 20. Type radio net, engineer shore battalion.

164
 6. The liaison officer of the shore platoon main
tains a direct personal contact with the BLT com
mander. Communication personnel of the section
lay a temporary telephone line from the beach to the
BLT command post. When the remainder of the
reconnaissance party lands, it enters the division
shore party lateral net, using man-pack radio equip
ment, and the BLT tactical radio net. The shore
party lateral net includes the shore party platoon,
company, and division shore party headquarters, and
the RCT and division Tac-Log Groups. It is the
first radio net established for the logistical control
of supplies landing over the beaches, as well as the
initial means for lateral communication between
shore platoons. The shore party wire line and BLT
tactical net are available for the receipt of requests
from the BLT commander for the landing of per
sonnel, supplies, or equipment. Wire lines are laid
from the shore company headquarters to the dumps.
All wire lines must be protected from vehicular traf
fic and construction activities, preferably by over
head installation. Assault wire is replaced by heavy
wire as soon as possible. The selection of wire routes
should conform to the plans for traffic control and
road improvement.
c. When the communications section of the shore
battalion lands, a communication center is estab
lished. It coordinates the functioning of the various
means of signal communication; operates communi
cations for the battalion command post, message cen
ter, and information center; provides wire and radio
communication with the supported units and with
shore parties on adjacent beaches. Lines extend to
the dumps, the vehicle and equipment pool, evacua-
165
tion station, the beachmaster, and the shore company
command posts.
d. When the headquarters of the division shore
party is established ashore, lines are laid to the sup
ported ECT's, companies, dumps, and vehicle as
sembly areas. The' lines to BLT headquarters can
then be abandoned. Radios join the command net
of the amphibious support regiment, the lateral net
if it is still in operation, and the RCT tactical net.
Included in the command net are the shore company
headquarters, the Tac-Log Groups, division head
quarters, and division shore party headquarters. As
a secondary mission, the radio section assists the
naval beach party in operating a visual communica
tions station.
e. At each echelon of the shore party, a local radio
net is operated linking the shore party commander,
his naval assistant, and the communications center.
Public address systems are used by the shore party
commander to disseminate information and to issue
orders directly to subordinates on the beach. Beach-
masters also control amphibious vehicle and landing
craft traffic, and direct landing, retraction, and sal
vage operations by the broadcast method. Visual
communications between the beach and ships are es
tablished, employing signal towers erected on the
beach.
/. Naval radio nets linking the beach party with
vessels include the transport division boat control
net, to direct the landing of scheduled waves, and
later used for boat traffic control; a transport divi
sion administrative net which provides the primary
channel for supply requests, data concerning the
progress of unloading and casualty evacuation, and
166
administrative matters relating to beach party work;
and a control vessel common net used to control the
ship-to-shore movement.
158 Dumps
a. Beach dumps are organized in two phases. In
itially, temporary dumps for each class of supplies
are established by the shore platoons and used for
the first few days of the operation. As soon as suf
ficient operating personnel and equipment are avail
able, supply points are established.
b. Initial dumps are located as close to the landing
points as possible, which allows both circulation of
motor vehicles and localization of possible fires.
They should be about 200 to 500 yards from the
water's edge. If closer, they are more vulnerable to
enemy bombing and strafing, and beach congestion
will be increased; if farther inland, control from
the beach is difficult, and the problems of beach de
fense become more complex. Temporary dumps
should be sited so as to require the minimum con
struction of new roads.
o. As supplies and equipment are unloaded, they
are moved immediately to the appropriate dumps.
The shore platoon commander keeps the Tac-Log
Group informed of his capacity for handling supplies
and equipment.
d. Within each dump, supplies are segregated ac
cording to type, caliber, or similar distinguishing
characteristic which will permit rapid issue and in
ventory. Stacks should not be more than about three
feet high, and well separated from each other. Fuel
and ammunition must be well dispersed and, if pos
sible, stored below ground level. Dumps must be
167
 located on firm ground with good natural drainage.
Dumps containing supplies for the Air Force and
the technical services are operated by personnel from
the using service. Supplies are organized and stored
according to the standards prescribed by the appro
priate service.
e. All personnel in charge of dumps must maintain
proper records. Quantities of supplies received, is
sued, and on hand are reported to the shore party
commander at regular intervals. The shore party
commander must know at all times the level of sup
ply in the beach dumps, and the amount remaining
on board ships to be unloaded.
/. Permanent dumps are located within a con
venient transportation distance from the beach, but
must include an area large enough to allow for the
proper dispersal of supplies when the maximum ton
nage is stocked. If the enemy has atomic capabilities,
the dump area must be dispersed to the maximum
extent practicable. Duplicate dumps, several miles
apart, will be established for each class of supply.
g. The fire-fighting personnel of the battalion su
pervise fire precautions in the beach dumps. Safety
measures are carefully observed. Class III and class
V dumps should be separated by at least 2,500 yards.
No more than 30 tons of ammunition should be stored
in a single bunker, and bunkers should be located at
least 30 to 40 yards apart. If an L-shaped bunker
is used for gasoline and ammunition, firefighters can
use tankdozers, or armored-cab bulldozers to push
piled-up dirt over the blazing gasoline or ammuni
tion, or to spread the contents of the dump for quick
consumption.

168
 h. When permanent storage areas are established,
the temporary dumps are continued in use until
exhausted.
159. Prisoners of War
a. Initially, during the beach assault, prisoners
are handled by the shore party echelon established
ashore. They are delivered by the combat units to
designated collecting points on the beach. Depend
ing upon the plan in effect, they are either retained
at the collecting points or evacuated to designated
ships offshore. Military police, working closely with
the shore party headquarters, operate the collecting
points, which are located so as not to interfere with
other shore party activities. Casuals and walking
wounded are used as much as possible to provide
prisoner guards.
&. If an inclosure is established, the intelligence
officer of the highest landing force headquarters es
tablished ashore is notified of the location. When
the amphibious support regiment assumes control of
beach operations, a central PW inclosure is usually
established. Every effort is made to dispatch as
many prisoners as possible to the transports before
shipping leaves the area.
c. All commanders are responsible that the treat
ment and care of prisoners conform to the Rules of
Land Warfare. Except when labor definitely bene
fits the prisoners, they must be credited with pay for
work performed. They may not be used for work
that is unhealthful or dangerous, nor can they be
employed to make or transport arms and munitions.
If the shore party is required to use PW labor, medi-

169
cal care, food, water, sanitation, quarters, and secur
ity must be provided.
d. Wounded prisoners are processed through the
medical evacuation chain. Since they are an ex
cellent source of information, shore party medical
personnel and unit intelligence officers cooperate
closely in processing prisoner' casualties. Interroga
tion teams are stationed at the evacuation stations to
interview wounded prisoners.
160. Evacuation of Civilians
a. The shore party may be required to evacuate
civilians from the area of operations. If the move
ment is for a short distance, shore party landing craft
may be used. Close coordination with the Navy will
be necessary. Usually, this type of evacuation will
be directed by the headquarters of the division shore
party.
l>. The landing force may carry several tons of
rations and other supplies for the relief of the civilian
population. This will require additional dumps and
personnel. Arrangements for the issue and safe
guarding of these supplies will be coordinated with
civil affairs personnel attached to the division shore
party for the purpose.
161. Stragglers
During the initial stages of the landing, stragglers
may be assembled at collection points near the com
mand posts of the shore companies, and either re
turned to their parent units or held until the division
military police establish routine straggler collection
procedures. Military police attached to the shore
companies usually operate straggler patrols in the
170
beach area until normal straggler lines can be estab
lished in the beachhead. Stragglers are put to work
in the beach area until they are returned to their
units.
162. Water Supply
a. Normally, each individual taking part in the
assault carries two filled canteens, and units bring
in filled 5-gallon water cans. If water is not avail
able ashore, empty water cans are either returned to
the transport or a Navy water tanker for refilling, or
are refilled from tanks installed in landing craft.
DUKW's may be fitted with a Navy ponton cell,
which is used as a tank to bring fresh water from a
ship offshore to a distributing point on land.
&. As soon as possible after landing, the water
supply personnel of the engineer shore battalion must
establish water points. These should be located at a
source that is accessible by a suitable road, provides
an all-weather parking area off the road for trucks
waiting to secure water, and is near a class I supply
point. One water point should be near the beach,
to serve troops in the beach support area. The bat
talion has two sets of water supply equipment. If
all water for the landing force is secured from the
beach support area, the division engineers may as
sist the shore party in operating water points, or
may establish additional ones. The division is ca
pable of operating four water points.
c. Locating water sources, and purifying and stor
ing water, are normal shore engineer functions. The
using units are responsible for water delivery. Med
ical personnel of the battalion determine whether or

171
not the water is safe, and enforce sanitation regula
tions.
d. It may be necessary, until fresh water sources
are available, to employ distillation equipment to
convert salt water into drinking water. Water tech
nicians of the engineer shore battalion are trained
in the operation of distillation equipment. The
naval construction battalions also operate distillation
units when necessary. Where water is highly pol
luted, wells may be driven into the beach sand above
the water line until better inland sources can be
developed.
163. Native Labor
a. If proper security safeguards can be maintained,
and proper control insured, local civilian labor may
be employed for unloading, stockpiling, construction,
and general laboring tasks. The use of civilian la
bor releases trained shore party personnel for super
vision and more important duties. However, the
following disadvantages must be considered:
(1) There is the possibility of pilfering and sab
otage.
(2) The shore party may have to provide quar
ters, food, clothing, sanitary facilities, and
medical care.
(3) The strength of native workers is often lim
ited because of disease and poor nutrition,
and their work output may not be worth
the extra burdens placed upon the shore
party organization.
(4) Training may be necessary before they can
perform useful work.

172
 b. If local labor is employed on a major scale, their
care and control are usually undertaken by the head
quarters of the division shore party, which may have
a civil affairs detachment attached to it for that pur
pose. Local labor leaders should be used as foremen,
and all control exercised through them. Whenever
possible, local construction methods and labor or
ganizations are used.
c. Where a language difference exists, interpreters
must be provided, and all instruction sheets, forms,
and signs must contain information in both
languages.
Section III. GENERAL UNLOADING

164. General
a. After the combat needs of the landing force
have been met, general unloading begins. This is
the nonselective discharge of units and cargo from
the transporting vessels as rapidly as beach capaci
ties will permit. It proceeds with little regard for
the tactical situation ashore.
&. General unloading accomplishes the quick turn
around and release of shipping, and delivers the max
imum total tonnage to the shore. If the ships have
been loaded with correctly balanced cargoes, general
unloading will provide the landing force with all
types of supplies in the shortest time and with the
fewest complications. Whenever possible, supplies
are sent ashore in units of fire and days of supply.
Thus, if a transport must leave the area or is sunk, a
proportionate amount of each class of supply will
be on shore. Each landing craft should carry only
one class of supply, and only one item of that class.
173
 This facilitates distribution and handling of supplies
by the shore party.
G. While speed in unloading is important, it should
not be greater than the speed with which supplies
can be moved across the beach to inland dumps.
Beaches are generally small and become crowded
quickly; if supplies pile up, they interfere with effi
cient shore party operation, and are subject to pil
fering, or to damage and destruction by enemy
action. The shore party commander may stop the
landing of units, supplies, and equipment on his beach
when conditions justify such action. The tactical
commander must be informed immediately if this is
done. Bequests for deviation from the planned se
quence of landing must be held to a minimum.
d. Cargo is unloaded from the ship by a ship's pla
toon. This is an organization of laborers, either mil
itary or civilian, obtained through prior planning-
from a reserve combat unit, port unit, or other pre-
designated unit, or from local labor sources. It is
divided into details corresponding to the number of
hatches on the ship, with 15 men usually being as
signed to each hatch.
e. During the initial stages of a landing, the boat
battalion places its craft under Navy control for the
ship-to-shore movement. When the assault trans
ports have left the area and naval control of the ship-
to-shore movement ends, the commander of the am
phibious support regiment assumes responsibility for
lighterage operations.
165. Commencement of General Unloading
a. No predetermined time can be set, in planning,
for the start of general tinloading in any particular
174
operation. Changes in enemy dispositions, unknown
or unforeseen obstacles, changes in the landing force
schedule, weather conditions, and other variables pre
vent any prediction as to when general unloading
will become feasible.
b. During the ship-to-shore operation, general un
loading will be indicated when the following condi
tions have been met—
(1) The scheduled and on-call waves have
landed, and the attack is progressing sat
isfactorily.
(2) A sufficient number of nonscheduled serials
have been landed for support of the attack,
the floating dumps have been landed, and
enough supplies are stocked in dumps to
reach the preplanned levels by classes, suffi
cient to supply the landing force for a de
termined period.
(3) The beaches and dumps are organized and
prepared so that large amounts of any class
of supplies may be moved rapidly across
the beaches and placed in dumps; personnel
and equipment can be landed with assurance
of adequate space for bivouacs, maneuver
areas, and storage.
c. When these conditions have developed, the land
ing force commander recommends to the naval am
phibious task force commander that general unload
ing be commenced. When the order is given to
begin general unloading, the Tac-Log Groups dis
solve. The tactical members are relieved, but cer
tain of the logistical members remain aboard the
control vessels, continuing their functions. Trans-

175
ports then start to unload their cargoes into landing
craft.
166. Selective Unloading
The initiation of general unloading does not pre
vent further selective unloading if an emergency
arises ashore. For example, an urgent need may
arise for antiaircraft ammunition in an unusual
quantity. All efforts are then concentrated on un
loading the ammunition. This is done, however, at
the expense of other classes of supply, so that an
other shortage may develop which requires further
selective unloading. One supply dump after another
may become overburdened, preventing the shore
party from operating at maximum efficiency. Selec
tive unloading is practicable only when ships are
loaded so that critical cargo is readily accessible, can
be easily identified, and can be unloaded in sufficient
quantities to meet the greatest demand anticipated,
without first having to move other types of cargo.
Ammunition is the main class of supply loaded on
assault shipping for possible selective unloading.
When the vessel is loaded, ammunition is segregated
by type and quantities to permit selective unloading
if the need arises.
167. Cargo-Handling Rates
a. The time required for unloading depends upon
many factors, including—
(1) Amount of cargo to be unloaded.
(2) Characteristics of the ships involved.
(3) Handling gear available.
(4) Landing craft available. *
(5) Experience of ship's crew and shore party.
176
 (6) Size of the shore party.
(7) Weather conditions.
(8) Distance of cargo ships from the beach.
(9) Enemy air, ground, or naval action.
(10) Beach characteristics.
b. Where general unloading is conducted without
active enemy opposition, the lighterage of an entire
transport division is usually concentrated first on
unloading the APA's, and then the AKA's. Under
good conditions, all the APA's will be discharged by
the early evening of D-day, assuming the normal
dawn H-hour, and unloading of the AKA's will be
under way. The APA's can leave the area, if their
organic landing craft are not needed for lighterage.
AKA's will be unloaded by the early morning of D
plus 1, and AK's from 12 to 24 hours later. LST's
may be completely discharged by nightfall of D-day
under ideal conditions. These figures are based on
typical operations conducted in the past, and are
given solely for the purpose of illustration.
c. Hatch crews on the cargo ships are composed
normally of personnel from the transportation port
companies, who first stevedore the ships on which
they arrive, and then are shuttled to other ships for
unloading. An average discharge rate is five hatches
at five long tons per hour, or 500 long tons per 20-
hour working day. Actual hatch discharge rates de
pend on the type of cargo being unloaded at any
particular time. Hatches are usually worked two
10-hour shifts a day.
168. Unloading Equipment
a. Importance. The rate and efficiency with which
cargo is handled across the beach depend largely
305640—54———12 177
upon the amount of unloading equipment in use by
the shore party.
Z>. Cranes.
(1) Cranes are essential for handling heavy
lifts, such as boxed vehicles, machines, fuel
in drums, and similar items which cannot
be loaded or unloaded by manpower alone.
The engineer shore battalion has organic
crawler crane-shovels capable of handling
from 1 to 10 tons, with %-cubic-yard ca
pacity. Additional cranes and operators
are required in normal operations, and are
usually secured from engineer equipment
companies, or class IV stocks. Early on
D-day, cranes may be provided from the
boat maintenance battalion, but these are
needed for maintenance activities after the
first day of the operation. Two or more of
the engineer shore battalion cranes may also
have to be used for excavation work. It is
estimated that there should be at least 26
cranes available to the battalion for both
beach and dump operations. This provides
10 cranes on the beach, 10 in the dumps, and
6 in reserve for use in construction work.
(2) The crawler-type cranes are generally sta
tioned on the beach near the surf line, to
take cargo from the landing craft and place
it in waiting trucks (fig. 21). They may
also be used at offshore transfer points.
Truck-mounted cranes usually are employed
at the beach dumps. A crane and its crew
can generally handle about ten long tons of
cargo and equipment per hour. Under good
178
 conditions, a crane can handle about 75 long
tons a day when lighterage is used, or about
150 tons a day in dockside unloading. All
cranes should have two sets of slings, of all
types, and an adequate number of chains
and hooks. Each crane should be provided
with at least 25 additional cargo nets, so
that the net does not have to be removed
from a cargo load until the load has been
delivered to the dump. Frequently a tem
porary platform is improvised for a crane
to prevent interruption of operation by surf
action.
(3) LeTourneau cranes (M-20) can be drawn
for an amphibious landing and used advan
tageously for general beach work. The
crane is towed by the pintle of a D-7 or D-8
type dozer, using two power take-offs from
the dozer winches. So rigged, it can lift
and drag loads up to 20 tons. The crane
is a semirigid gallows type with large
pneumatic tires and a twenty-foot tongue,
which allows it to back into the surf and
recover stalled vehicles, small landing craft,
and material.
(4) To supplement cranes, pin poles or A-
frames may be constructed, as described in
TM 5-225.
G. Ponton Cells.
(1) Naval amphibious construction battalions
provide ponton cells which can be assem
bled into floating sections for use as barges,
causeways, or piers (fig. 22). The basic
ponton cell is a structurally reinforced steel
179
Figure 21. Crawler crane unloading palletized supplies from
landing craft.

box measuring 5x5x7 feet with a light

draft of 20 inches. It is capable of support
ing a 2i/2-ton load, with 12 inches of free
board remaining above the surface.
(2) The pontons can be assembled into sections
of 2 x 30 cells (about 15 ft. wide, including
the connecting links, and 175 ft. long).
Any number of sections can be joined to
make a causeway of the desired length.
These sections are normally side-carried on
LST's, although they may also be carried
in LSD's, or towed to the landing area by
tugs or ships. Usually the sections are
launched in the outer transport area, assem
bled into a'causeway, and pushed to the beach
by a warping tug. The latter is an arrange
ment of cells powered by heavy-duty out
board motors. The causeway may also be
brought to shore fastened alongside an LST;
180
 as the ship grounds, the causeway is released,
and momentum carries it forward to the
beach.

Figure 22. Tanks discharging from LST over a ponton

causeway.

( 3) Barges are easily assembled from the ponton

cells, using outboard motors for power.
These barges are three cells wide and 12
cells long, and are usually side-carried on
LST's. They are excellent lighters, trans
porting 75 tons of cargo at 5 knots per hour,
and require little maintenance. Two barges
for every five cargo hatches being dis
charged, plus a, reserve barge for every ten
hatches, have proved to be a desirable allo
cation. Jetties large enough to allow the
free movement of cranes and trucks are nec
essary to unload barges without delays and
congestion at the beach. By securing a

181
 ponton barge across the seaward end of one
or two causeways, a pier may be formed.
d. Bulldozers.
(1) Bulldozers are used during unloading op
erations to tow sled pallets out of landing
craft; salvage vehicles stalled in the sand or
shallow water; remove tree stumps, debris,
and similar obstructions at the water's edge;
and tow artillery, heavy equipment, and
trailers without prime movers, across the
beach. In an emergency, they can be used
to push stranded landing craft back into
water that is deep enough to float them.
(2) When landing ships must let down their
ramps, in wet sand or shallow water, the
bulldozers are used to extend sand causeways
to the ships (fig. 23). The sides of these
causeways are revetted with sandbags, logs,
or fuel drums.
(3) A three-man crew is desirable for each bull
dozer. Two men assist the driver by hook
ing and unhooking tow cables, and in guid
ing the bulldozer. With proper teamwork,
the driver should never have to dismount,
and the bulldozer should be in continuous
operation.
e. Other Equipment.
(1) Fork-lift trucks are useful for cargo han
dling both 011 the beach and in dumps. Firm
surfaces must be provided if the trucks are
not of the tracked type.
(2) Sled pallets carry a normal load of 2,000
pounds. They may be moved through the

182
 surf or over any beach which can be crossed
by a DUKW or LVT, and may be preloaded
with rations, water, fuel in 5-gallon cans, or
ammunition. When normal methods cannot
be used, supplies may be loaded on floating
pallets and towed in by landing craft or
landing vehicles.
(3) Roller conveyors are valuable in. unloading
smaller items, particularly rations. Impro
vised wooden chutes, skids, and troughs may
be made if roller conveyors are not available
in sufficient quantity.

Figure 23. Bulldozer extending sand ramp to LST.

(4) Large numbers of sandbags should be pro

vided for the construction of causeways and
other purposes. Sandbag causeways are
rapidly installed, but endure only a short
time and ordinarily must be replaced daily.

183
 (5) Nets, slings, and other equipment coming
ashore with loads must be returned to ships
at once. Otherwise, a shortage of these
items will delay cargo discharge at the
hatches. The use and maintenance of
cargo-handling gear are discussed in FM
55-110.
169. Amphibious Trucks (DUKW)
a. Each division shore party will usually have at
least one amphibious truck company attached, in
addition to its organic DUKW's. The DUKW is an
excellent combination of lighterage and motor trans
port (fig. 24). It is used to—
(1) Transport troops, equipment, and supplies
from the transport area to and across the
beach to beach dumps. In an emergency,
the DUKW may be utilized to transport
equipment and supplies inland from unload
ing points.
(2) Evacuate casualties to receiving ships.
(Twelve standard litters can be placed in a
DUKW; it is hoisted aboard the ship before
being unloaded.)
(3) Provide floating dumps for critical supplies
during the assault.
(4) Unload landing ships which beach in
shallow water.
(5) Transport troops and cargo ashore from a
transfer line (see par. 170).
b. Compared to landing craft, DUKW's have the
following advantages in unloading operations:
(1) They can make uninterrupted trips to beach
clumps over reefs or other offshore obstacles.
184
 Figure 24. Amphibious truck (DUKW) landing on 'beach,

(2) They can operate under most tide conditions,

with no concern for the landing craft prob
lem of retraction.
(3) They can deliver cargo directly to inland
dumps.
(4) They can be used efficiently to unload ramp-
type landing ships which are beached in
shallow water.
(5) They are not so adversely affected by surf
conditions.
c. The disadvantages of using DUKWs for un
loading are—
(1) They are much slower than landing craft,
and are not seaworthy in heavy seas.
(2) They are uneconomical, having a high rate
of fuel consumption and requiring consider
able maintenance.
(3) They are difficult to moor alongside a ship.
(4) They cannot carry large items of equipment.
185
 (5) They are difficult to unload by hand, due to
their height, and the lack of a tailgate or
ramp.
d. DUKWs may be used to unload a landing ship
if a water area exists between the beach and the ship.
The DUKWs are taken aboard the landing ship over
its ramp and loaded while aboard the ship. Loading
may also be accomplished alongside the ship by using
nets, cranes, or chutes, but this is a slower and less
satisfactory method. Amphibious trucks are not
well suited for unloading APA's and AKA's.
e. Control points are located near the DUKW
landing areas. All vehicles are dispatched through
these points when arriving at the beach, and before
departure. A liaison officer from each attached am
phibious truck unit lands with the division shore
party commander and remains at the command post.
All DUKW operations are controlled by this officer
and his assistants.
/. When loads must be taken inland for a distance
of two miles or more from the beach, or for shorter
hauls that require cross-country travel, cargo is trans
ferred from the DUKWs to conventional trucks at
the landing point (fig. 25). Fork-lift trucks
mounted in cargo trucks, or cargo trucks fitted with
• A-frames, may be used to transfer loads when suffi
cient cranes are not available.
g. Separate landing points should be established
for DUKW's, to avoid the deep underwater holes that
are dug out by the propellers of landing craft.
h. DUKWs equipped with a power winch and A-
frame are useful for salvaging equipment and sup
plies that have fallen into the water, and for remov
ing underwater obstacles and debris.
186
 Figure 25. Unloading DVKW at transfer point.

i. The DUKW is useful for exploring, charting,

and sounding the shallow water approaches to a
beach, in order to select the best sites for landing
points.
j. DUKW's are excellent for towing stalled ve
hicles, since the tire pressures can be decreased read
ily, enabling the vehicle to maneuver at the water
edge and in dry sand. The use of DUKW's for this
purpose frees dozers for their primary missions of
road construction and towing heavy equipment.
k. Detailed information concerning the employ
ment of DUKW's is contained in FM 55-150.
170. Transfer Line
When landing craft cannot beach because of ob
structions in the landing approaches, such as reefs,
sandbars, or rocks, a transfer line is established just
seaward of the limits of safe navigation for landing
craft, and out of range of enemy small-arms fire. At
187
the transfer line, personnel and cargo are transferred
to amphibious vehicles for movement to the beach.
Loads which consist principally of cargo are trans
ferred by shore party personnel or special working
details stationed in boats at the transfer line. Trans
fer of cargo may be facilitated by using short boards
as chutes. In the later stages of the operation, small
floating cranes may be available, or cranes mounted
on ponton barges may be used.
171. Resupply Shipping
a. Normally, the landing force carries supplies
sufficient for about two weeks of combat operations.
This provides a reserve if the planned supply buildup
is interrupted by enemy action or adverse weather.
The decentralization of supply services ashore also
requires a high level of all classes of supply in the
initial phase of the operation.
£>. Resupply convoys usually begin arriving within
a week after landing. These consist of vessels carry
ing balanced loads of all classes. They may be un
loaded selectively or in bulk.
c. Resupply may also be provided by landing ships
directly from the far shore. These ships may carry
preloaded trucks, which go directly to beach dumps
upon landing, and require no cargo-handling by the
shore party at the landing points. Rear area un
loading details may accompany landing ships, re
turning to the far shore with the empty ships.
d. When the naval transports leave, unloading
lighterage comes under the control of the commander,
amphibious support regiment. Usually a Navy Fleet
Activities group remains ashore to provide pilots
and control facilities in the sea area. Representa-
188
tives of the Military Sea Transport Service (MSTS),
with long-range communications equipment, arrange
for the reception and anchorage of bulkloaded
transports.
e. Cargo vessels are met at sea by a boarding party
that includes a shore party officer from the head
quarters of the amphibious support regiment and a
representative of MSTS. This party instructs the
ship's master in the unloading procedure and the
designated anchorage. The shore party officer se
cures copies of the manifests, so that unloading
priorities can be determined. Desirable anchorages
are recommended by the shore party commander,
depending upon the time and method of unloading
he considers advisable. A vessel that is to be un
loaded with DUKW's, for instance, should be an
chored fairly close to shore, while a ship that is
not to be unloaded for some time may be anchored
well out from the area, and called closer when the
shore party is ready to unload. MSTS controls all
movements and anchorage of shipping in the sea
area.
172. Cargo Security
a. All shore party personnel must be alert to
prevent pilferage and sabotage. This is especially
important when native personnel are used to assist
in unloading. Items such as gasoline, food, clothing,
post exchange and special service supplies, tires,
tubes, automotive parts, beverages, and medical
supplies are particularly sensitive to pilferage, since
they are readily adapted to civilian use. Damaged
or broken containers invite theft. They should be
segregated and kept under guard pending issue. All
189
supplies on shore must be guarded to prevent looting
and pilfering. The beach area must be kept clear
of personnel not required to be there by their duties.
If civilians are hired, they must be issued passes and
a system must be established to control their move
ments. Military police are employed to guard cargo
easily subject to pilfering, and are stationed on
hatches, decks, in lighters, on trucks, and all other
points where losses may occur.
5. Handling mail is a special problem that requires
close coordination between the shore party head
quarters and the postal sections of all units. Ar
rangements are made to safeguard mail in the beach
area until it is delivered to authorized personnel from
the units.

Section IV. SHORE PARTY ADMINISTRATION

173. Control
a. Shore party operations require close supervision
and control by the battalion commander and his staff.
They must insure that all elements are working at top
performance, that equipment is properly allocated,
and that bottlenecks are eliminated promptly. The
operations officer and supply officer, and their assist
ants, have particularly exacting duties, especially in
the early stages of beach operations.
6. The operations officer must—
(1) Insure that labor and equipment are utilized
promptly and efficiently to unload light
erage.
(2) Direct the organization of the shore party
into balanced shifts, making sure that each
shift receives adequate meals, but that mess-
190
 ing arrangements do not cause excessive
interruptions to unloading operations.
(3) Provide for proper maintenance of equip
ment.
(4) Arrange for the construction of additional
landing points, causeways, and jetties
needed to facilitate efficient unloading.
(5) See that truck drivers are provided with
road maps, that routes are clearly marked
and understood, that turn around times for
trucks at the dumps are not excessive, that
shore party trucks are not diverted to other
uses.
(6) Establish transfer points for transfer of
cargo from DUKWs to trucks, insuring that
this operation is speedily conducted.
(7) Arrange for adequate road maintenance.
(8) Arrange to keep military police at traffic
control points, and personnel manning in
formation centers, fully informed of the
situation.
(9) Maintain liaison with dumps, keeping in
formed of their activities, and insuring that
trucks are properly unloaded and returned.
(10) Supervise operation of prisoner-of-war
collecting points.
(11) Keep all elements of the shore party in
formed of the situation and of changes in
plans and orders.
(12) Plan the tactical employment of shore
party troops in defense of the beach support
area.
(13) Prepare and submit the required beach op
eration reports.
191
 (14) Provide adequate beach lighting for night
operations.
c. Until the technical services provide sufficient
personnel, the supply officer must direct dump opera
tions. This responsibility requires that he—
(1) Maintain a dump for each class of supplies;
plan the dumps to facilitate transportation
of cargo from the beach and issue to the
using units.
(2) Provide adequate labor and equipment at
each dump to insure prompt unloading and
turnaround of trucks.
(3) Keep a running inventory of each dump,
showing the supplies received and issued.
(4) Insure that dumps, and storage piles within
dumps, are dispersed, and that provisions
have been made for fighting fires.
(5) Set up a lighting system for night opera
tions.
(6) Collect the daily report from each dump and
submit a consolidated daily status of supply
report to the operations section. These re
ports are in addition to others which may be
prescribed by the shore party headquarters.
174. Working Conditions
The work output of shore party personnel will
be affected by the weather, climate, terrain, and
enemy action. Continued snow or rain, intense heat
or severe cold, swarms of insects, muddy or frozen
ground, all reduce the amount of work that can be
performed efficiently. Every effort should be made
to provide for the comfort of the men, and to improve
their working conditions. Shelter and clothing suit-
192
able for the climate should be provided, and men
should be given as much opportunity for rest as the
situation allows,
175. Two-Shift Operation
a. Beach operations require 24-hour activity. On
D-day, all members of the shore party work at max
imum speed to organize the beach and to unload
assault shipping. When the initial combat needs
of the landing force have been met, the shore party
is reorganized to provide continuous operation in 12-
hour shifts. Each shift is organized to operate in
dependently of the other.
&. The operator of a vehicle or a piece of equip
ment is assigned to one shift and his assistant to the
other. In this way, vehicles and equipment are al
ways operated by assigned personnel. Maintenance
personnel are also divided into two balanced teams,
one for each shift, so that emergency repairs can be
accomplished at any time.
c. When the shore party operates on a two-shift
basis, routine administration must be kept to a min
imum. Clerical and headquarters personnel are em
ployed on the beach for supervisory and labor tasks.
In a well-trained shore battalion, all enlisted men,
regardless of normal assignment, will be capable of
performing the duties of vehicle drivers, equipment
operators, winchmen, and similar specialists. Unit
commanders insure that headquarters personnel
maintain themselves physically fit for arduous labor
and are fully aware that they may be required to
perform such duties at any time during beach
operations.

305640—54——13 193
 176. Night Operations
a. At night, beach operations are conducted under
artificial illumination. If possible, shift changes
should take place in daylight hours, so that night-
shift operators can become oriented before darkness.
Any night-operation hazards should be clearly
marked before nightfall.
&. An adequate warning system, and central con
trol of flood-lighting equipment, are essential, so
that the beach can be blacked out in case of an
enemy air attack.
177. Messing
a. Initially, shore party personnel carry combat
rations ashore. As soon as conditions permit, com
pany kitchens are established, and hot food is trans
ported in insulated containers to the working areas.
&. When two-shift operation is initiated, mess per
sonnel are also divided into shifts. Usually the mess
steward supervises the day shift, and the senior cook
is in charge of the night shift. Breakfast may be
served to men going on shift, and a box lunch distrib
uted to them, with supper served immediately after
the shift completes its tour of duty. Hot meals
served on the job are preferable to box lunches, how
ever, and should be provided whenever possible.
G. In addition to providing meals for its own per
sonnel, the battalion headquarters mess will be re
quired to feed observers, casuals, correspondents, and
similar transients. Additional rations should be se
cured and kept in reserve for unexpected visitors.

194
 178. Sanitation
Special attention must be given to beach sanitation
from the time of landing. The large numbers of
troops on the beach require strict sanitary discipline
and adequate facilities. Latrines, properly marked,
should be dug as soon as possible, and made acces
sible to debarking troops. Shore party medical per
sonnel must exercise close supervision over sanitary
measures throughout the beach support area, par
ticularly in the vicinity of medical installations, and
in other places where concentrations of personnel
occur.
179. Bivouac Areas
Shore party bivouac areas are established in the
vicinity of the beach perimeter, so that defenses can
be manned readily in the event of an enemy attack.
Bivouac areas must also be provided for transients.
The selection and arrangement of bivouac areas are
discussed in FM's 5-6, 100-5, and 100-10, and in
TM 5-280.
Section V. DEFENSE OF BEACH SUPPORT AREA

180. General
a. The commander of the amphibious support reg
iment is responsible for the ground defense of the
beach support area. Commanders of all units in
the area have their normal responsibility for the
security of their personnel and equipment. Security
includes all measures taken to protect a unit against
enemy interference, surprise, and observation.
6. The perimeter defense of the beach support area
is provided by the reinforced engineer shore battalion
195
and its attached units, under the direction and con
trol of the amphibious support regiment. Addi
tional combat troops may be provided from the
landing force if the situation permits. Antiaircraft
positions within the beach support area are under the
control of the shore party commander as far as the
ground defense plan is concerned.
a. Counterattacks against the beach support area
are likely, including tank attacks and attacks at
night. Members of the shore party may also have
to clear out snipers and enemy troops bypassed by
the assault troops. All personnel of the engineer
shore battalion must be prepared to maintain their
security and must be trained in the use of their wea
pons and in basic infantry tactics.
181. Organization for Defense

a. Upon arrival at the beach, the shore companies

site their weapons to provide local security against
air and ground attacks. The locations of crew-
served weapons are tentatively selected in the plan
ning period, and checked by reconnaissance upon
landing. Alternate positions for security against at
tacks from seaward are also selected. The organic
armament of the battalion and its attached units may
be supplemented with the weapons of landing craft
disabled in the assault. Heavy-weapon defenses are
coordinated by battalion headquarters, and later by
the amphibious support regiment headquarters when
it assumes control of the beach.
6. Each unit of the shore party is assigned a por
tion of the defense perimeter that includes its bivouac
and area of normal employment. Perimeters are or-
196
 ganized and outposted as fast as the situation permits
and requires. Emergency assembly areas are selected
for each unit and an alert warning system is estab
lished.
c. An overlay of the shore party defense position
is circulated to all units, including assault troops and
the boat battalion, to avoid intramural fights at night.
d. To protect against a mechanized attack, anti
tank mines and obstacles are installed as soon as
possible after landing, to block the critical avenues
of approach into the beach area. Antipersonnel
mines and booby traps are used to secure the per
imeter against infiltrators. Landing force engineers
may assist the shore party by installing mines and
obstacles and by preparing shelters and emplace
ments.
e. After completing their initial mission of land
ing the assault infantry and furnishing them fire
support, amphibious tanks and tractors may be used
in perimeter defense. They are sited to take maxi
mum advantage of their mobility and firepower,
either as a mobile counterattacking force, or to cover
the most likely avenues of enemy attack. Amphib
ious tanks and tractors may also serve as beach or
reef outposts, or as inshore patrol vehicles to repel
counterlandings, flanking attacks, or infiltrations
from seaward. Amphibious tractors are used as per
sonnel, light vehicle, and cargo carriers, especially
over reefs and shallow areas not navigable by
DUKW's and landing craft. Figure 26© shows an
amphibious tractor and figure 26® an amphibious
tank.

197
 © Landing vehicle, tracked, MK 4. LVT (4).

® Landing vehicle, tracked (armored), MK 5, LVT (a) (5).

Figure $6. Amphibious tractor and tank.

198
182. Employment as Infantry
a. The engineer shore battalion should be assigned
infantry missions only in an emergency. In amphib
ious operations, the battalion may be employed to
reinforce portions of the landing force perimeter, or
to occupy sectors near the beach. Normally, the
battalion is attached to a larger infantry unit. This
insures the proper coordination of artillery, naval
gunfire, and air support.
Z>. Engineers have many limitations when em
ployed as infantry. Compared to an infantry bat
talion, the engineer shore battalion has relatively
few supporting weapons, such as mortars, heavy
machine guns, and automatic rifles. It cannot act as
infantry, even for a short period, without augmen
tation or support from other arms and services.
Communication equipment and personnel are not
sufficient for infantry operations. The training of
shore engineers stresses technical and logistical sup
port functions, rather than advanced infantry tactics.
To compensate for these disadvantages, battalion
units are usually assigned smaller frontages than
infantry organizations of corresponding size.
183. Reorganization
a. The organization of shore battalion units is not
suitable for infantry tactics. Accordingly, the bat
talion must be reorganized, to form suitable com
mand, rifle, crew-served weapon, supply, arid liaison
elements. The extent of reorganization will vary
with the size of the unit, the time available, and the
mission. If deliberately committed to the defense
of a sector, the battalion usually will have time for

199
a reasonably thorough, reorganization.. If the bat
talion must be committed rapidly to meet a surprise
airborne, waterborne, or guerilla attack, a hasty
reorganization must be made to meet the immediate
demands of the emergency.
J. Eeorganization is based upon a standing operat
ing procedure, frequently rehearsed during training
periods. Normally each unit is formed into a for
ward echelon and a rear echelon. The forward eche
lon consists of the elements which actually engage
in combat; plus necessary command, communica
tions, and supply groups. Personnel, vehicles, and
equipment not needed for combat are placed in the
rear echelon. This includes kitchen trucks, dump
trucks, cranes, bulldozers and similar equipment,
with enough men to protect them and to carry on
essential administration.
c. Units attached to the engineer shore battalion
for shore party operations may be formed into sepa
rate companies or battalions under the command of
the shore party commander. Personnel from these
units may also be used to increase the strength and
armament of the shore companies.

184. Air Raid Security

Normal passive and active security measures to
protect the beach support area are established and
coordinated by the amphibious support regiment.
Shelters are provided for personnel, a system of alert
warning signals is set up, and all installations are
camouflaged. Barrage balloons may also be used.

200
 Section VI. BASE DEVELOPMENT

185. Consolidation
a. When the BLT beaches are consolidated into a
division beach, the base development plan is initiated.
Temporary dumps are phased out; permanent dump
areas are established and improved. The engineer
shore battalion furnishes construction equipment and
personnel for clearing dump areas; digs slots and
bunkers for the dispersal and storage of ammunition;
prepares fuel storage bays and bunkers; and per
forms similar improvements. The road net is com
pleted for two-way traffic, and new roads are made
where the development plan calls for them. The
shore party, assisted by advance detachments from
the base units, builds unloading slots, jetties,
wharves, bulk fuel unloading facilities, water supply
installations, and storage and headquarters build
ings. The division beach support area may be de
veloped gradually into a complex base section con
taining many square miles of open or covered storage,
and terminal facilities for the logistical support of
hundreds of thousands of troops.
6. The base operating forces may consist of either
naval forces under a Naval base commander, or an
Army advance or base section formed by the Army
communications zone headquarters. In either case,
representatives of the base organization are attached
to the landing force from the start of the planning
period.
c. Within two weeks after D-day, the commander
of the base organization normally arrives at the beach
support area, accompanied by key staff officers. He
checks the area against his plans for base develop-
201
 ment, and modifies the plans as actual conditions may
require. Follow-up snipping brings in additional
base units, heavy equipment, and construction ma
terials. The shore party is gradually phased out,
the attached units reverting to their parent com
mands as base units take over their functions. Per
manent logistical installations and base facilities are
constructed and placed in operation, and by about D
plus 60 the base usually will be completely operative.
d. The engineer shore battalion, when relieved of
its shore party responsibilities, may be employed for
construction duties, retained under base control, re
leased for another amphibious operation, or placed
in a training status.
186. Priority of Base Development
The development of a beach support area into a
base usually includes the following projects, per
formed in the general priority shown:
a. Provision of permanent beach facilities, includ
ing wharves, docks, and jetties.
&. Development of permanent dumps.
c. Development of airfield facilities, first for
fighters, then for patrol aircraft, and finally for
bombers and transports.
d. Extension of road net, strengthening and wid
ening the roads, constructing bridges, installing
culverts, etc.
'e. Development of a water supply system.
/. Beginning of harbor clearance.
g. Establishment of bulk storage and unloading
facilities for POL.
h. Setting up of repair facilities and shops for
ships and vehicles.
202
 i. Development of an extensive communication
system.
j. Repairing of railroads and railhead facilities.
k. Construction of fixed-type hospitals, depot
areas, replacement depots, and staging areas.
Z. Construction of personnel housing, mess halls,
and warehouses.
187. Port Operations
a. The engineer shore battalion is seldom employed
to operate a port or base, although occasionally it may
provide extended logistic support for a combat unit
operating independently. Normally, the battalion is
relieved as soon as its shore party missions have been
accomplished.
&. If the battalion is required to operate a small
port, it must be reorganized and heavily reinforced
with personnel and equipment. Additional support
may be provided by attaching units or by assigning
large numbers of replacements. Details of port op
erations are contained in FM 55-25.
G. When reorganizing to operate a port, the bat
talion must provide four main functional groupings:
(1) Port control: handles berthing or anchor
ing of ships.
(2) Motor control: handles all vehicles.
(3) Labor control: assigns labor.
(4) Cargo control: records the discharge of all
ships, and the buildup of supplies.
d. Port operations require centralized control with
a highly-developed communication system. Liaison
and coordination with naval personnel must be main
tained. Because the battalion will have limited per
sonnel for the complex requirements of its mission,
203
detailed planning and careful scheduling are re
quired. Unnecessary paperwork and administrative
routine must be avoided; port operation demands
the greatest economy in the employment of personnel,
the maximum use of cargo-handling equipment, and
careful supervision of maintenance.

204
 CHAPTER 10

RETROGRADE MOVEMENTS

Section I. GENERAL

188. General
a. The evacuation of a beachhead may be ordered
to prevent defeat of the landing force by a superior
enemy; or for strategical reasons, to employ the force
to secure an objective in another area. When the
withdrawal is nontactical and there is no threat of
enemy action, the withdrawal is a normal adminis
trative embarkation, and presents few unusual
problems. Withdrawal in the face of enemy oppo
sition is a difficult and dangerous maneuver, how
ever, and requires the greatest efficiency in planning
and execution. Air and naval superiority in the
embarkation is essential, and there must be the closest
coordination between all the elements involved.
b. Consideration should be given to withdrawal
plans before the need for them arises, as a routine
precaution. The shore party commander should be
prepared to submit a withdrawal plan upon request
from the landing force headquarters. This plan
shows the suggested organization of the beach for
the evacuation, including proposed assembly areas,
loading slots, and traffic circulation, as well as rec
ommendations concerning the composition of a shore
party adequate for the movement.
o. During the outloading process, some highly
selective unloading may also be necessary, to provide

205
such items as motor fuel and lubricants for vehicles
in use, ammunition, and fortification materials.
189. Requirements
The tactical evacuation of a landing force
requires—
a. Continuous operation of the beach or port.
&. Orderly and protected withdrawal to staging
areas of all combat and service units in the proper
priority for embarkation.
c. Loading of these troops on the assigned ship
ping.
d. Evacuation of civilian refugees.
e. Removal of equipment and supplies.
/. Denial operations to prevent the use by the
enemy of any abandoned supplies, equipment, and
installations.
190. Reinforcement
The existing shore party must be heavily rein
forced to handle a withdrawal. In most situations,
cargo and personnel must be embarked at a rate
much faster than in a normal embarkation, requir
ing considerably more shore party labor and equip
ment. The nature and extent of the reinforcement
needed will depend upon the time available for em
barkation, and the loading facilities and equipment
in the beach area. Additional engineer construc
tion battalions, military police companies, and service
units from the landing force are usually attached to
the shore party. Marine shore party companies and
naval construction battalions, if present, are also
placed under the control of the Army shore party
commander.
206
191. Reorganization
a. Normally, all available shore party troops are
formed into two task organizations. One is assigned
the responsibility for loading vessels and landing
craft; the other handles beach operations. Both
groups are placed under a single provisional head
quarters, commanded by the senior officer of the
shore party. Depending upon the size of the land
ing force, this would be the commander of the am
phibious support brigade, for a corps; or the com
mander of the amphibious support regiment, for a
division.
&. Staff officers of the amphibious support brigade
and regiment are employed to provide command and
staff for the provisional shore party groups, and as
expediters on the beach or aboard ships. Routine
staff and administrative functions are held to a min
imum, and staffs are reduced to the smallest size
practicable, so that all efforts may be directed toward
achieving a rapid and orderly evacuation.
c. Personnel for loading and other labor duties
are furnished largely by the landing force. Officers
from the landing force are employed as loading offi
cers at slots and aboard vessels, and are assigned to
staff and supervisory duties within the beach area.
192. Staging Area
The shore party is responsible for preparing and
operating facilities for staging the withdrawing
combat units. This may include—
a. Clearing additional assembly areas.
b. Erecting shelters, establishing tent camps, and
providing sanitary facilities.

107
 c. Providing parking areas.
d. Repairing roads and damaged rail lines.
e. Operating a transient mess capable of around-
the-clock feeding.
193. Advance Detachment
The shore party may send an advance detachment
by air or ship to prepare the debarkation area for
the arrival of the landing force. Included in the
detachment will be representatives of the landing
force.

Section II. CONDUCT OF WITHDRAWAL

194. Sequence
a. When the withdrawal begins, all nonessential
supplies, equipment, and troops are outloaded first.
This includes shore party impedimenta and any
equipment not essential for beach operations. Bulk
cargo, equipment, and service troops outload next,
followed in order by the embarkation of the combat
troops, less the final covering force, and the with
drawal of the covering force and the shore party.
Withdrawal plans establish a carefully considered
priority for the outloading of troops and equipment,
to insure that the beach will remain secure, and that
all necessary loading personnel and equipment will
be available until the evacuation is completed.
6. The shore party phases its withdrawal with the
lust tactical unit to be evacuated.
195. Outloading Procedure
a. Loading of cargo, troops, and equipment is
accomplished by the same methods and procedures
208
used in a normal embarkation. A central control
office is established, operated by the shore party
commander and his staff. Representatives of the
landing force and of the naval organization are on
duty at the control office to serve as liaison officers
and coordinating authorities.
&. At each loading slot, officer representatives of
the shore party commander are stationed to expedite
loading operations. These officers are usually as
signed in pairs, so that one is always on duty, day
and night. Every three hours, the loading slot offi
cer submits a report to the shore party operations
officer, indicating the percentage of loading com
pleted. He also renders spot reports on deficiencies
of any nature, and assists loading officers in solving
problems that may arise while the ships are being
loaded.
196. Loading Equipment
Organic cargo-handling equipment usually will be
insufficient for the demands of an emergency evacua
tion, because of the unusually large volume of cargo
to be loaded, and the speed with which loading opera
tions must be conducted. This is particularly true
of such accessories as slings, chocking material, and
spreaders. Company equipment-repair platoons
may be assigned the tasks of manufacturing these
items.
197. Traffic Control
Military police are responsible for controlling
traffic in the beach area and on roads leading to it.
Traffic will be heavy, since many thousands of ve
hicles may converge upon the outloading area. A
305640—54- —14 209
traffic circulation and control plan must be prepared
and strictly followed. No convoys are permitted to
enter the beach area unless they are earmarked for
immediate outloading, or for movement into a desig
nated vehicle assembly area.
198. Security
Perimeter defense of the beach area is provided by
the landing force, with naval gunfire support fur
nished by vessels stationed offshore. Local security
against infiltrators, guerrillas, and saboteurs must be
provided by all shore party commanders.
199. Native Labor
While native laborers, directed by local overseers,
may prove useful in outloading operations, they are
not dependable if the beach area is under enemy at
tack, or if evacuation cannot be provided for them.
The use of native labor also increases the danger of
sabotage.
200. Refugees
In addition to evacuating the landing force, the
shore party may have to provide for the embarka
tion of large numbers of refugees. This may in
clude feeding them and furnishing sanitary and
medical facilities. Civil affairs detachments with
the landing force normally supervise the handling
of refugees, but the shore party must direct their
embarkation. Military police control the movement
and assembly of refugees, confining them to specific
routes and areas so that they will not interfere with
beach operations. Mobile riot squads may be fur
nished from combat troops to quell any disturbances
210
among the refugees. The presence of refugees in the
beach area requires increased vigilance against sab
otage and espionage, as well as precautions against
pilfering.
201. Denial Operations
a. When the landing force withdraws, it leaves
behind nothing of possible value to the enemy. En
gineers, possibly assisted by Naval demolition teams,
destroy all installations, using explosives or ammuni
tion that must be abandoned. Rations and fuel are
destroyed by burning and equipment is rendered use
less by the techniques prescribed in appropriate tech
nical manuals. If time permits, the beach area and
the entrances to it are mined, and booby traps are
installed.
5. The landing force establishes priorities for the
destruction of—
(1) Supplies and equipment.
(2) Utility installations.
(3) Routes of communication.
(4) Port and harbor installations.
(5) Other items of military value.

211
 CHAPTER 11

OTHER ASPECTS OF OPERATIONS

Section I. SHORE-TO-SHORE OPERATIONS

202. General
The engineer shore battalion or its elements, suit
ably reinforced, may provide shore party support for
waterborne envelopments, logistical support opera
tions, navigable-river operations, or raids. In a
shore-to-shore movement, troops and materiel go
directly from an embarkation area to the objective,
without transferring to other vessels at sea.
203. Waterborne Envelopments
a. Purpose. Waterborne envelopments are coastal
flanking movements to exploit successful landings
or to assist in destroying enemy forces, to the flanks
of the landing area, that might interfere with the
principal operation.
b. Characteristics.
(1) Waterborne envelopments include most of
the characteristics normal to all amphibious
operations. The range of the envelopment
is limited by the length of time or water dis
tance over which the landing craft or ships
can transport troops safely to the landing
area in condition for combat. This distance
is restricted by the living facilities on loaded
landing craft and the weather and sea con
ditions during the voyage.

212
 (2) Less time is required to plan a waterborne
envelopment than for ship-to-shore move
ments; logistical planning is simplified,
since the landing force usually can be sup
plied from the embarkation shore. Reserves
and supporting units can be held in readi
ness on the embarkation shore, and do not
have to be embarked with the landing force.
Air support is also facilitated, due to the
shorter distances involved.
G. Embarkation. The landing force for a shore-
to-shore movement can embark more quickly than
for a ship-to-shore operation. Normal embarkation
support is provided by the shore party, including
assistance in preparing plans and orders, control of
the embarkation procedure, and the preparation of
embarkation facilities. A large number of landing
craft and ships is required to carry the landing force
and to provide for its supply until reinforcement
can be provided from the far shore.
d. Supply. Since the landing force is supplied
from the far shore on call, the buildup of supplies
on the beach is held to a minimum. Supply levels
sufficient for from two to ten days operations are
maintained, depending upon the distance from the
far shore. Supply installations are kept to a mini
mum and only organizational maintenance is per
formed.
e. Shore Party Operations.
(1) Shore party support for a BLT may consist
of a reinforced shore platoon; for an RCT,
a reinforced shore company; and for a divi
sion, a reinforced engineer shore battalion.

213
 In most shore-to-shore operations, the re
quirements for shore party support on the
far shore are greatly reduced, since the
beach does not require a complex organiza
tion, and the amount of unloading is rela
tively small.
(2) For a landing force smaller than an EOT,
shore parties are seldom furnished, particu
larly when resupply is on a day-to-day basis.
In this type of operation, the amphibious
support regiment usually provides a liaison
officer, with a small detachment, to coordi
nate operations on the beach. This group
marks the beach, arranges for unloading de
tails from the landing force, and controls
the arrival and departure of convoys. The
landing force S4 sends the necessary trucks
and personnel to meet arriving convoys and
to unload cargo.
204. Logistical Support Operations
Landing craft and ships may be used to supply
troops stationed away from the base area. From a
shore party viewpoint, this type of operation is sim
ilar to a tactical waterborne operation, and has the
same requirements. Shore party units provide near-
shore loading and supervision of the supply convoys,
and furnish any necessary shore party support on
the far shore.
205. Navigable-River Operations
a. Purpose. Navigable rivers may be used by tac
tical units to—

214
 (1) Provide mobility when road nets to the in
terior are nonexistent, thus avoiding slow
and costly land campaigns.
(2) Cut communications in rear of the enemy
by securing a point where his supply line
crosses a navigable river.
(3) Strike at installations in the enemy rear,
seizing an objective before the enemy can
redispose his forces to defend it.
(4) Conduct raids and hold key points for a
limited period of time.
(5) Establish or support isolated posts inland.
(6) Conduct reconnaissance in advance of a ma
jor force.
(7) Protect the flank of a main body advancing
overland.
b. Shore Party Support. Normal near-shore sup
port is provided by the shore party for units engaged
in navigable-river operations. Usually these opera
tions are conducted by small task forces, and a reg
ularly constituted shore party is not necessary at the
objective area. The type of liaison detachment that
accompanies the landing force in a small waterborne
envelopment is also adequate for shore party require
ments in a navigable-river operation.
206. Raids
a. Purpose. Raids may be conducted to—
(1) Gain specific information.
(2) Test enemy defenses.
.(3) Destroy such installations as supply depots,
docks, airfields, or headquarters.
(4) Test new weapons or equipment.
215
 (5) Harass the enemy, lowering his morale.
(6) Boost the morale of our own forces when
they have been inactive for long periods, or
to encourage underground forces.
(7) Support land campaigns by striking at en
emy rear installations from the sea, forcing
the enemy to redispose his forces.
(8) Attack enemy flanks resting on the coast
line.
b. Shore Party Support. Most raids are con
ducted on a small scale, and the combat troops occupy
the beach for only short periods, so that there is no
need for shore party support on the far shore.
Specialists from the engineer shore battalion may ac
company the raiding forces as demolitionists, or to
perform such pioneer duties as laying mats for land
ing craft. Normal shore party assistance in embark
ing the raiding force is provided on the near shore.

Section II. NIGHT LANDINGS

207. General
a. In a night landing, the ship-to-shore movement
and the seizure of initial objectives are conducted
under the cover of darkness. The same principles
and techniques used in a night landing are also em
ployed when a landing is made in heavy fog or under
other conditions of greatly reduced visibility.
&. Possible advantages to be gained by a night
landing are—
(1) Tactical surprise may be achieved, if there
is a choice of suitable beaches or objectives
available to the attacker. This may be the

216
 case when the enemy has considerable
strength, but still is unable to defend every
possible landing beach on a long coastline.
(2) Fewer casualties may result, because of the
shorter period of time that the attacking
forces are exposed to aimed fire. Enemy
fire is less effective in darkness, due to lack
of observation.
(3) Enemy air activity is restricted.
(4) The chances for success of a numerically
inferior force may be increased.
c. In most situations, the disadvantages of a night
landing outweigh any advantages that may be gained,
for reasons such as these—
(1) Control and maintenance of direction, both
in the sea area and on shore, are difficult to
maintain, and leaders are greatly hampered
in the command of their units.
(2) Ship-to-shore movement and navigation are
difficult.
(3) Adequate naval gunfire and air support can
not be maintained.
(4) Enemy reserves can be moved to decisive
areas without danger from the attacker's
supporting weapons.
(5) Landing force troops require special train
ing and extensive rehearsals to take part in
a night operation.
(6) Unloading operations are greatly ham
pered.
(7) Darkness is a doubtful aid to surprise, since
it causes as much confusion among the at
tacking troops as it does to the enemy.

217
208. Characteristics
Assault units are given limited objectives in a night
landing, and attack with reduced frontages. Objec
tives must be well denned and readily identifiable
in the darkness. Units land in close formations, in
order to maintain control, contact, and communica
tion, both during the ship-to-shore movement and
after landing. Radar and other special navigational
devices are used to assist in maintaining direction.
Airborne troops may be employed to neutralize the
beach defenses prior to the amphibious landing.
209. Preparations
a. Detailed information about the objective area
is particularly important when a night landing is
contemplated. If possible, planning officers, includ
ing members of the shore party, should take part in
airplane reconnaissance of the area during the pre
paratory phase. All personnel must be thoroughly
briefed on the terrain to the flanks of the selected
beaches, so that if they are landed in the wrong place
they will be able to orient themselves and proceed
with their missions. About 50 percent more time is
required for training and rehearsals in a night land
ing, compared to a daylight operation.
&. Beaches selected for a night landing must be
large enough to accommodate the landing force
under the conditions of intermingling and initial dis
organization that may arise. The terrain behind
the beach should have distinctive terrain features
that will serve to guide landing craft and troops
ashore. It should permit beaching landing craft and
ships close enough to the shoreline to permit rapid
218
debarkation and movement inland without undue in
terference from surf and obstacles. These desirable
characteristics make it difficult to find beaches that
are fully suitable for night landings.
210. Ship-to-Shore Movement
a. Debarkation at night is a slower process than in
the daytime. Lowering the landing craft takes more
time, troops move more slowly in debarking, and
boat control signals are hard to see. Hooded lights,
chalk lines, fluorescent deck buttons and tapes are
used to guide troops aboard the transports. Noise is
reduced to a minimum, and the quietness of the in
dividuals is a test of their prior training.
b. The line of departure may be closer to the beach
than in a day landing. The interval between boats
is usually smaller, but the distance between waves
may be increased, so that boats in the earlier waves
will be able to clear the beach before the later waves
arrive. Boats travel to shore much more slowly
than in daylight.
c. Whenever possible, beaches should be marked
by underwater demolition teams, partisans, or pa
trols before the landing. Beaches may be marked
with lights visible to seaward, with infrared devices,
or with radio or radar beacons. If it is not possible
to establish markers ashore beforehand, other means
must be used, such as scout boats which reconnoiter
the beaches from seaward in the early hours of dark
ness and then act as guides for the leading waves.
Landing craft are used exclusively in a night land
ing; landing ships are beached in darkness only in
emergency situations.

219
211. Shore Party Operations
The shore party rarely conducts beach operations
before dawn in a night landing. Reconnaissance
parties go ashore with the early assault waves, how
ever, to select dump locations, check routes, recon-
noi'ter the beach terrain, erect markers, and generally
to prepare for unloading. Shore party executive
officers join the Tac-Log Groups, and the remainder
of the shore party units complete all arrangements
to land as soon as daylight begins. If the tactical
situation permits the use of lights on the ships and
on the beach before dawn, normal shore party oper
ations are initiated.

Section III. JUNGLE OPERATIONS

212. Characteristics
a. Jungle areas are characterized by excessive heat
and humidity; abundant insect and animal life, in
cluding parasites, pathogenic organisms, and molds;
torrential rains and tropical storms; and dense vege
tation.
&. Beaches in jungle areas are often narrow, lim
ited by swamps or steep mountains close to the shore.
As a result, tactical beachheads are apt to be shallow,
restricting the size of the beach support area. The
heavy jungle growth makes movement difficult off
the beach and away from roads.
, c. Jungle heat and humidity place a severe strain
upon the mental and physical stamina of personnel.
Morale is adversely affected by the prolonged physi
cal hardships, the constant threat of disease, and the
depressing psychological effects of the jungle. Camp
sanitation is difficult to maintain, due to the heavy
220
rains, flooding, and high ground water level. Be
cause of the extreme heat, the working efficiency of
personnel is greatly reduced, and it may be neces
sary to limit heavy-labor tasks to the cooler hours
of the late afternoon or evening.
d. Jungle operations are discussed in FM 72—20.

213. Beach Operations

a. Because beach support areas in jungle terrain
are usually limited in size, the normal dispersion of
dumps and other installations cannot be achieved.
In many situations, units of the landing force will
establish and operate their own dumps in the beach
area, using their organic service troops. Torrential
rains, and storms that often reach hurricane propor
tions, increase the difficulty of beach operations in
many tropical climates. Shore party personnel often
must be diverted from their normal duties to main
tain roads and dump areas in operating condition
and to repair the damages caused by extreme weather.
(See fig. 27.)
5. Dumps must not be located in low-lying areas
which may be subject to flash floods. Large numbers
of tarpaulins must be provided to protect supplies in
dumps against rain, intense sunlight, and insects.
Shelters may be constructed of local materials to
provide protection for stored supplies.

214. Maintenance
Engineer equipment receives very severe treatment
in jungle operations. Machinery and all exposed
metal must be kept lubricated and protected from
rust and corrosion. Only equipment in first-class
condition should be taken and there should be a 30-
221
Figure 27. Unloading on a jungle beach; ponton barges in
the foreground.

day parts supply. Wooden structures rot rapidly;

clothing and shoes mold and deteriorate. Commu
nications equipment must be moistureproofed and
fungiproofed. Under tropical conditions, batteries
have a much shorter life, and at least twice the usual
supply must be provided. Field wire lasts only a
few days when laid on the ground.
215. Construction
Timber, rock, coral, and strong vines are available
for construction in jungle areas. Some jungle woods
are pithy, however, and lack structural strength,
while others are extremely hard and cannot be cut
with ordinary hand tools. Untreated wood deterio
rates rapidly, especially if in contact with a moist
surface or immersed in salt water. Material sources
should be located close to the working areas, to avoid
long hauls and the need for cutting access roads.
216. Roads
a. Usually roads must be cut into the jungle to
provide areas for initial dumps and other beach sup
port installations. Because of the dense vegetation,
bad foundations, and poor drainage, roadbuilding
is unusually difficult. Maximum use must be made
of expedient methods and materials.
b. Roads for heavy traffic should be from 30 to 35
feet wide, plus shoulders. If possible, the sides
should be cleared of underbrush for from 80 to 120
feet, so that the road surface will dry out. In the
latter stages of beach development, it is often desir
able to clear a right-of-way for the road well in ad
vance of construction, so that the sun can dry out
the ground. Koads in low-lying or swampy terrain
may have to be on high fills supported by mat foun
dation, particularly if they are intended for heavy
traffic.
c. Mud slows down vehicular traffic on jungle
roads, even in comparatively dry weather. During
or after a rain, trucks may take hours to complete
the round trip from beach to dumps even though
the distance may be less than a mile. Wheeled ve
hicles will bog down continuously, requiring tow
service by shore party tractors. As a result, cargo-
handling proceeds at a slower rate and more shore
party personnel and equipment are required than
for an operation in temperate climates.
217. Water Supply
Tropical climates increase water supply require
ments, but water is available in quantity, and can be
purified by normal treatment. Water sources must

223
be carefully checked by medical personnel, since they
usually contain pathogenic organisms.

Section IV. ARCTIC OPERATIONS

218. Missions
Amphibious operations in the arctic normally will
not involve forces larger than a reinforced infantry
battalion or regiment. Suitable objectives might in
clude the destruction of an enemy installation, such
as a radar or weather station, or the establishment
of such a station. Detailed information about arctic
operation is contained in FM's 5-6, 31-70, 31-71,
and 31-72.
219. Regions
The arctic region comprises areas where the aver
age temperature for the warmest month does not
exceed 50° Fahrenheit. Its southern boundary is
approximately the tree line. The subarctic region
comprises the area where the mean temperature of
the warmest four-month period is less than 50°
Fahrenheit.
220. Characteristics
a. In addition to the low average temperature,
the short summer season and the almost universal ice
and snow, the coastal arctic is also subject to violent
gales. During the summer months when open water
is prevalent, heavy fog prevails; however, from De
cember through March, fog conditions are practially
nonexistent in areas 200 miles from the nearest open
water. Wherever ice and open water meet there is
fog throughout the year. Because sudden changes in
224
 weather are common, reliable and timely forecasts
are essential. Periods of extreme cold followed by
comparatively warmer periods with frequent bliz
zards may hamper military operations during the
winter months.
5. Ice begins to form on the Arctic Ocean in the
latter part of September, reaching its maximum
thickness in May. In cold weather, sea ice forms
rapidly, often as much as four or five inches over
night. New ice may reach a thickness of from five
to seven feet in one winter. When planning an am
phibious operation, open areas and ice conditions
cannot be predicted from previous records. Ice re
connaissance conducted several weeks before the
landing date will provide little information about
the conditions that will exist on D-day. Only actual
contact with the ice pack will reveal its depth and
the location of possible lanes. Standard types of
amphibious vessels may be employed, but the hulls
must be internally reinforced, and landing ships re
quire external reinforcing at the bows. All ships
must have their bronze propellers replaced by steel
ones, which can withstand greater punishment from
the ice.
c. Engineer operations in the arctic are character
ized by a lack of roads and the resulting difficulty of
land movement; extremely limited local resources
for construction materials and labor; greatly in
creased supply and equipment requirements; and
difficult working conditions.
d. The arctic climate imposes many hardships on
personnel, and greatly reduces the labor output of
troops. To make up for the loss in human efficiency,
there is an increased requirement for materials-
305640—54———15 225
handling equipment. Men must have adequate cold
weather clothing, high caloric rations, and warming
tents or wanigans (heated huts mounted on sleds).
Working shifts must be organized so as to permit
frequent opportunities for men to rest and to become
warm.
e. There are no diseases peculiar to the arctic, but
personnel are subject to frostbite, colds, exposure,
snowblindness, freezing, and exhaustion, creating an
increased requirement for medical personnel. In
the summer months, mosquitoes and other insects are
present in unusually large numbers. During the
winter, precautions must be taken against carbon
monoxide poisoning due to the extensive use of heat
ing equipment in confined quarters. It is difficult
to maintain proper standards of health and sanita
tion, especially when shelters, latrines, and washing
facilities cannot be kept reasonably warm. No man
accompanies the unit if he is suffering from an upper
respiratory infection, acute sinusitis, or rheumatism,
or has a history of repeated frostbite, severe trench-
foot, or defective vision.
/. Troop morale is adversely affected by arctic
conditions, and requires particular attention from
commanders. Men living in confined quarters dur
ing the winter months are apt to become depressed,
due to the loneliness, lack of communities, and limited
recreational facilities.
221. Terrain Conditions
a. Permanently frozen ground, or permafrost, is
the feature of arctic terrain that is most important
from an engineering viewpoint. Permafrost is a
thickness of soil, sand, gravel, or other unconsoli-
226
 dated material in which a below-freezing tempera
ture has existed for a long time, but which contains
no ice. The thickness of permafrost varies, depend
ing upon the vegetation, composition of the soil,
water content, snow cover, and exposure. Lying
above the permafrost is an active layer of season
ally frozen ground, which thaws in the summer and
freezes in the winter. It ranges in thickness from
six inches to seven feet. The bottom of the active
layer is sometimes called the frost table and re
sembles a water layer in ordinary terrain. During
the year, the temperature in permafrost varies from
about 8° to 30° Fahrenheit. Because of the perma
frost, water from melting snow and precipitation
cannot drain below the frost level. Drainage is en
tirely by runoff across the surface of the soil, creat
ing marshes and swamp areas.
5. In the lowlands, the ground thaws in spring to
a depth varying from a few inches to as much as 6
to 10 feet. The dominant soil consists of a base of
very soft mud covered with a thick layer of moss,
lichens, sedges, arctic willow, and other dwarfed
deciduous plants and shrubs. Once this layer is
punctured, there is no support until the permafrost
is reached. Effective drainage is prevented by the
permafrost. Temporary roads and airfields disin
tegrate and more permanent ones become unusable.
The extensive areas underlaid by permafrost turn
into bogs and there are heavy floods.
222. Shore Party Requirements
In planning shore party support for an arctic am
phibious operation, the composition of the shore

227
party is conditioned by the fact that normal supply
and maintenance requirements must be multiplied
four to nine times to meet the conditions of climate
and terrain. This requires a shore party larger than
that normally in support of a BLT or ROT in tem
perate zone operations. There will be increased re
quirements for cargo-handling and construction
equipment, depending upon the seasonal conditions
and the nature of the terrain in the objective area.
Special training in cold-weather technique must be
given to all personnel during the preparatory phase.
223. Unloading Operations
a. In the summer months, beach areas will present
problems of extreme mud, swamps, and rocky ter
rain. In the winter, if shelf or bay ice is present
and not higher than the decks of ships, it may be
possible to moor APA's alongside the ice, with "dead-
men" for mooring. Heavy equipment is landed as
far out on the ice as the ship's boom will reach. Sup
plies must be moved off the ice as fast as they are un
loaded, to prevent weight from building up on the ice.
Ramps for landing ships may be prepared by blast
ing. It is important that oversnow vehicles, such as
LVT's, weasels, or snowmobiles, are deck-loaded, so
as to be available for early discharge.
&. Shipping is dependent upon the season of open
water, which varies from three weeks to four or five
months, depending upon the area. Accordingly, it is
difficult to schedule resupply shipping. During ice-
free periods, shore party unloading operations must
be conducted at maximum speed.

228
224. Equipment
a. All unloading equipment must be winterized and
available in sufficient quantity to handle the peak
load anticipated during the operation. Snow-re
moval equipment must be provided, as well as addi
tional compressed-air tools, explosives, and demoli
tions equipment for breaking frozen ground. Search
lights are required for use in periods of low visibility.
&. Sufficient repair parts must be carried to insure
that all vehicles and equipment will be operable
throughout the period. Tire chains must be pro
vided for all wheeled vehicles. Because of the snow
and extreme cold, maintenance operations are slow
and tedious. Heated tents, temporary buildings, or
beached landing ships are used for maintenance ac
tivities, and for storing vehicles and equipment not
in use. There is an increased need for recovery
vehicles to recover and repair equipment that is
disabled or that falls through the ice.
225. Construction
Excavation is difficult and foundations are unde-
pendable in arctic terrain. Fills made of frozen ma
terials thaw and heave badly in the spring. Although
timber is abundant south of the tree line, construction
materials are generally scarce in arctic regions. In
the Avinter, "icecrete," a dense frozen mixture of
water, sand, and occasionally gravel, may be used
for construction. Native labor is not well suited for
construction work.
226. Roads
a. Roads should be sited on high, well-drained
areas of gravel and sand that are exposed to the sun.
229
 If possible, roads should not be placed on silt, peat
or other organic soils, low and boggy ground, or on
ground that shows signs of earth movement and frost
action. Cuts, including sidehill cuts, should be made
only when absolutely necessary.
l>. Most vehicles are immobilized in wet snow from
three to five feet deep. Tracked vehicles can usually
move at slow speeds in packed snow that is less than
three feet deep. In the arctic, roads stand up best
when they are covered with six inches of traffic-
packed snow, which provides a hard, smooth surface
that. is not easily rutted. The snow insulates the
roadbed, protecting the deep frost from melting.
Fresh snow must be removed continuously from tile
surface by snowplows or dozers. Snow fences must
be erected to prevent roads and dumps from being
covered by drifting snow. Expedient materials are
used to provide surfaces on muddy areas and over
soft water-logged soil.
227. Water Supply
To provide potable water in the winter, the shore
party must have ice-melting equipment and facili
ties for the heated storage of water. Pumps and
filtering apparatus must be kept under cover, and at
temperatures above freezing. Intake pipes or hoses
and pipes used to distribute water must be drained
except when water is flowing through them.
228. Fire Precautions
In the arctic, fire precautions are of vital impor
tance, since materials and supplies are scarce and are
not easily replaced. The destruction of living and
working facilities may mean disaster for the landing
230
force. When practicable, structures are dispersed,
to reduce fire risk.

Section V. EFFECTS OF SPECIAL WEAPONS

229. General
a. Amphibious operations are highly vulnerable
to radiological attack, particularly during the initial
landing and supply buildup, when the beaches are
congested. If the enemy has atomic capabilities, the
entire pattern of an amphibious operation will be
modified.
&. When an atomic attack is possible, wide disper
sion of troops and installations is the major require
ment in all phases of the operation. Instead of a
large-scale attack directed at a single point on the
enemy coastline, there may be a number of separate
landings made simultaneously by BLT's and KCT's
along a broad front. These forces will advance in
land rapidly, joining to establish a deep beachhead
zone. Well-separated beaches will be chosen for the
logistical installations in support of a large force;
major ports will be avoided.
c. There will be an increase in the raid type of at
tack. Troops may approach the landing area in
widely dispersed convoys, assemble quickly, hit the
beach in an intensive attack, then disperse again as
soon as the mission is accomplished.
d. An atomic bomb exploded under water offshore
by the defenders may deny a beach area to a land
ing force and, given favorable winds, might saturate
the beach with radiological materials. On the other
hand, the area would also be untenable by the de-

231
fense forces, and they could not control the extent
of contamination inland.
e. The threat of atomic attack might make a land
ing so hazardous that the initial assault would be
made entirely by airborne forces. If the airborne
landing was initiated as a preliminary to a large-
scale invasion, later support by surface vessels would
be necessary, and normal beach support facilities
would be required.
230. Effect on Operations
a. The threat of atomic attack increases the amount
of work to be performed by the shore party, without
changing technical procedures. Priorities must be
carefully established for essential tasks, and the
strictest economy of effort must be practiced.
5. Camouflage of large areas assumes added im
portance, and large quantities of camouflage mate
rials are required. The shore party commander pro
vides technical assistance and supervision for the
camouflage activities of all units occupying the beach
support areas.
c. While dispersion is the guiding principle in
atomic defense, it will be impracticable to disperse
abnormally within beach installations. Dispersion
must remain subordinate to mission. No one in
stallation should be of such size or importance that
its complete destruction would be a crippling blow
to the unit it supports. Installations must be sepa
rated by distances sufficient to keep them from pro
viding a profitable atomic target. There will be
smaller installations, but more of them. Duplicate
supply dumps, in areas several miles apart, will be
established for all classes of supply.
232
231. Atomic Defense Measures
The shore party commander is responsible for pro
viding security against atomic attacks within the
beach support area. His preparations include—
a>. Surveying the area for suitable shelters and
sheltered areas.
&. Dispersing units, equipment, and supplies as
much as practicable without sacrificing operational
efficiency.
c. Sheltering essential equipment and supplies
with canvas and other materials, as protection against
contamination. Underground storage is desirable.
d. Selecting sites for alternate water points (un
derground sources, if available).
e. Organizing medical, rescue, and evacuation
teams.
/. Preparing a radiological defense SOP based on
that of the amphibious support regiment.
g. Constructing and maintaining alternate roads.
232. After-Burst Activities
After an atomic attack, the shore party commander
may direct such tasks as the following:
a. First aid, rescue, and evacuation.
&. Establishment of personnel decontamination
stations.
c. Monitoring unit areas for the extent and in
tensity of radiological contamination.
d. Decontamination of essential areas.
e. Making and posting signs for unsafe areas.
/. Fighting fires.
g. Clearing debris from main traffic routes to f acil -
itate relief, supply, and evacuation activities.

233
 A. Producing a maximum of potable water.
(Water must be checked periodically for radioactive
contamination. Present equipment is adequate for
producing safe drinking water after an atomic
attack.)
233. Radiological Defense Organization
The problems of radiological defense are similar to
those of defense against chemical attack. Accord
ingly, unit gas officers and noncommissioned officers,
assisted by radiological defense monitors, are trained
to assist unit commanders in radiological defense
activities. The assignment and duties of these per
sonnel are outlined in DA Pamphlet 20-110.
234. Decontamination
a. The shore party commander is responsible for
the decontamination of areas that have been sub
jected to a chemical or radiological attack. Chemical
decontamination methods are described in FM 21-40
and TM 3-220. While chemical agents can be neu
tralized or destroyed, areas contaminated by radio
logical agents require physical removal of the agents,
or the contaminated surfaces must be covered with
a shielding material. When enemy chemical or ra
diological action is possible, decontamination agents
and equipment are included in the combat loads of
shore party units, and carried so that they are readily
accessible.
5. When an area is contaminated with radiological
agents, the landing force commander is notified im
mediately. If he requests further details, monitor
teams are sent into the area under the direction of
the division chemical and radiological defense officer.
234
These teams determine the extent and intensity of
the contamination. If time is a very important fac
tor and the area cannot be avoided, the landing force
commander may direct that shore party personnel
work in the area, or that portions of the beach under
go decontamination. Individuals may work in short
shifts to reduce the danger of serious contamination.
c. Radiological decontamination consists of re
moving or shielding-out the emission of radiological
materials. Live steam may be used to decontaminate
vehicles and equipment, or they may be thoroughly
scrubbed with soap and water. Shore party equip
ment and personnel may be treated at stations es
tablished by the landing force away from the con
taminated areas. The principles and procedures of
decontamination are presented in FM 21-40.
d. A large beach area may be rendered usable by
removing the upper six inches of contaminated earth,
or by placing a similar depth of fill to cover and in
sulate the contaminated surface. Bulldozers or road
graders may be used to clear lanes through contami
nated areas. Safe areas must be clearly marked and
posted with signs.
e. If operations in a contaminated area can be
suspended for a few days, radioactivity may be elimi
nated by natural decay, making extensive decon
tamination unnecessary. Contaminated offshore
water clears up quickly, especially where rivers
empty into the harbor and dilute the sea water.
235. Chemical Warfare
a. A defending enemy may attempt to restrict or
deny likely landing areas by maintaining heavy con
centrations of persistent gases on beaches and on the
235
 water, and by the use of chemical mines. After the
attacking force has landed, the enemy may employ
persistent or nonpersistent agents to cause casualties,
hamper beach operations, or lower the morale of the
attackers. The main effect of enemy gas attacks will
be to slow down or interrupt beach operations.
Shore party efforts frequently will be diverted to
decontamination tasks and the provision of protec
tive facilities.
5. Fire-producing agents, such as thermite and
napalm, may be used in enemy air attacks against
the beach support area. The possibility of fire bomb
ing will increase the importance of fire precautions
in all dumps and other shore party installations, and
may require additional fire-fighting personnel and
equipment.
c. In the attack, the landing force may employ
persistent chemical agents against enemy areas not
likely to be occupied by friendly troops while the
agents remain effective. Nonpersistent agents are
generally used against the beach itself. Fire-bomb
ing may also be employed against enemy installa
tions in the objective area.
d. Before the landing, intelligence agencies deter
mine the enemy capabilities for chemical attack, the
types of agents he is likely to employ, and the tech
niques he commonly uses in the chemical defense of
beaches. From a chemical warfare viewpoint, the
safest landing beaches are those that provide open,
wind-blown terrain, free from wooded areas, ravines,
hollows, or defiles.
e. A standing operating procedure for chemical
defense is followed by the shore party. Troops are

236
trained and rehearsed in individual and group pro
tective measures, and in decontamination procedures.
236. Smokes
a. In the ship-to-shore movement, screening
smokes may be employed to—
(1) Screen the assault waves from enemy fire.
(2) Screen the flanks of the assault waves, pro
tecting them from enfilade fire.
(3) Deceive the enemy as to the time and place
of landing.
(4) Interfere with the movement of enemy rein
forcements.
6. During the assault landing, screening smokes
are provided by supporting air, chemical, and naval
units. Smoke can be laid from smoke cylinders
carried by DTJKWs and landing craft, smoke gen
erators installed on transports, and floating smoke
pots dropped from craft or transports.
c. On the beach, smoke may be employed to screen
initial operations of the shore party, particularly
to protect demolition teams and reconnaissance par
ties. Smoke generator units may be attached to the
shore party, producing a smoke screen to protect
the beach when an air raid is imminent.
237. Biological Warfare
If the enemy is capable of using biological warfare
in the landing area, troops are inoculated and vac
cinated against the likely diseases before embarka
tion. Medical personnel direct the activities of field
biological teams, which detect and mark contami
nated areas. Members of the unit chemical and

23T
radiological organization also assist in area decon
tamination activities. Troops which have occupied
contaminated areas are quarantined until a field per
sonnel decontamination unit can determine which
individuals have contracted a disease and need medi
cal treatment. All epidemic disease cases are evacu
ated in ships designated for the purpose. When
biological warfare is a possibility, the shore party
follows the provisions of a standing operating pro
cedure prepared bj' the landing force headquarters.

238
 PART THREE

TRAINING

CHAPTER 12

PRESCRIBED TRAINING

Section I. GENERAL

238. Objectives
a. The objective of engineer shore battalion train
ing is to prepare the battalion for its normal function
of providing shore party support for forces in am
phibious operations. This includes—
(1) Indoctrination of every individual with an
understanding of the special characteristics
of amphibious operations, the role of the
engineer shore battalion, and his personal
responsibilities in shore party activities.
(2) Familiarization of all personnel with the
customs, characteristics, and capabilities of
other services.
(3) Achievement of proficiency in embarkation,
debarkation, and shore party operations.
(4) Achievement of proficiency in basic infantry
tactics, and in the use of organic weapons.
T). When the battalion is reinforced to form the
shore party for a particular operation, training is
directed toward securing coordination and teamwork
among all elements in the task organization.

239
239. Responsibilities
a. Commanders are directly responsible for train
ing their units. When training is for a specific oper
ation, the shore party commander is responsible for
training all elements of the shore party, including the
attached naval beach party.
5. The battalion operations officer is responsible-
for preparing plans, programs, and schedules for the
battalion and its attached units; securing training
aids and facilities; and preparing necessary records,
reports, and tests.
240. Training Doctrine
The principles and methods of instruction given
in FM 21-5 are followed in all training. Official
publications and training aids listed in the SR 310—
20 series, SR 110-1-1, appropriate Tables of Allow
ances, and FM 21-8 are the basic references for in
struction and training. Joint doctrine and proce
dures are established in directives and instructions
issued by the Department of Defense, the Joint Chiefs
of Staff, and the Department of the Army. These
procedures are partially presented in FM 110-5.
241. Property and Supply Responsibility
The shore party is responsible for the security and
protection of all Government property within its zone
of operations. This includes expendable supplies.
Condoning loose procedures in storage, handling, or
issue leads to the loss or misuse of supplies and equip
ment. Serious shortages may result. Supply is a
crucial factor in the success of an amphibious opera
tion. Members of the engineer shore battalion must

240
 receive constant indoctrination in their responsibility
for the proper use and maintenance of their equip
ment, the need for economy in the use of supplies,
and the prevention of pilferage.
242. Training Tests
• At appropriate periods during the training cycle,
Army training tests are given to units. These tests
determine the status, adequacy, and uniformity of
training. A unit that has conducted its training
properly will not need special preparation for a test
and no attempt should be made to anticipate the test
requirements. The Army training test is based upon
a reasonable standard of proficiency and contains no
requirements that are not covered adequately by the
appropriate Army Training Program.
243. Cadre Training
A properly trained cadre of officers and enlisted
men is essential in developing an efficient engineer
shore battalion. The many skills required in shore
party operations require trained and experienced in
structors and supervisors. In effect, the entire bat
talion is a cadre, since it provides the nucleus of the
shore party for an amphibious operation. Indi
viduals must be trained, accordingly, to assume
added duties and key positions in the shore party
organization. Cadre training is continuous; when
a soldier has acquired proficiency in his primary
MOS, he is trained in another cadre MOS. In a
general mobilization, the engineer shore battalion
may be called upon to furnish several cadres for
new battalions and the battalion commander is re-

305640—54———16 241
 sponsible for insuring that he can furnish competent
cadres whenever he is directed to do so.
244. Basic Unit Training
The greater portion of training time during the
basic unit training phase is devoted to small-unit
shore party operations, including instruction in—-
a. Organization of the shore party and character
istics of its equipment.
~b. Beach reconnaissance.
c. Beach organization and beach characteristics as
they affect shore party operations.
d. Use of beach markers and beach lights.
e. Construction of temporary facilities, beach
roadways, ramps, temporary piers, and other ex
pedients.

Section II. ADVANCED UNIT TRAINING

245. General
Advanced unit training begins when all elements
of the battalion have completed basic unit training.
Reinforcing units are assigned to the engineer shore
battalion, and shore parties are formed. These shore
parties train together, initially in their camp areas,
then on a local beach. The training culminates in
an amphibious landing exercise.
246. Platoon and Company Training
The objective of this training is to develop effec
tive shore parties formed around reinforced shore
platoons and companies. These shore parties are
trained in their fundamental missions of supporting
BLT and RCT landing forces. This training is
usually conducted in the camp areas.
242
247. Shore Party Beach Training
After the shore platoons and companies have com
pleted their training in the basic requirements of
BLT and EOT shore party operations, training is
conducted on a local beach. All elements of the
shore parties are drilled, rehearsed, and tested in
their functions. Landing craft are used, and every
effort is made to duplicate actual landing conditions.
248. Landing Exercises
a. All shore party training culminates in a land
ing exercise. If possible, this exercise is conducted
in conjunction with Navy and Air Force elements.
Troops, vehicles, and cargo are landed on a beach
under simulated combat conditions. Every effort is
made to secure realism, through the use of an aggres
sor force, all types of beach obstacles, blank ammuni
tion, and simulated air power. Careful umpire
control is provided. The exercise includes the build
up of troop strength, the consolidation of the shore
party, and the gradual relief of the shore party by
other units.
6. Because the failure of the shore party to handle
large amounts of cargo in the actual operation might
prove disastrous, great emphasis is placed upon un
loading activities in the landing exercise. Sufficient
quantities of supplies or dummy cargo and of equip
ment must be unloaded and landed under conditions
which approximate as closely as possible those to be
found in the objective area. The time and space
factors must be similar to the anticipated rate and
buildup ashore that will be required in a projected
operation.

243
 CHAPTER 13

POSTCYCLE TRAINING

Section I. GENERAL

249. General
a. Upon completion of the prescribed cycle, fur
ther training of the battalion is guided by directives
from higher headquarters and by plans made by the
battalion commander to correct the deficiencies he
has noted. The postcycle training program provides
a continuous review of previous instruction and in
cludes a wide variety of training exercises and ap-
plicatory problems. Supervised on-the-job training
is conducted to improve the efficiency of specialists
and to train them for higher MOS assignments.
5. -No specific number of weeks is prescribed for
the postcycle training period. In planning the pro
gram, the battalion commander is influenced by the
probable date of any future amphibious operation
and limits his schedule to the time that this target
date allows.
c. Important subjects in the Army Training Pro
gram may be repeated in postcycle training. The
results of training tests will indicate the subjects
that must be taught again to bring the entire bat
talion to a uniform standard of proficiency.
250. Training in Depth
a. Each individual in an engineer shore battalion
must be proficient in a number of skills; his knowl
edge cannot be limited strictly by the denned bound-
244
 aries of a single MOS. When the battalion is re
inforced to form a division shore party, many of the
enlisted men must perform duties as instructors and
supervisors for personnel of the attached units. Va
cancies may be created suddenly by the need for fur
nishing cadres, and by combat losses, illnesses, and
'transfers. Individuals normally assigned to clerical
and staff work may be called upon to operate equip
ment and perform labor duties in an operation.
~b. Training men in specialties other than those
called for by their present assignment is a continuous
process. As soon as a soldier qualifies in one MOS,
he should receive training in another. This is par
ticularly necessary to provide the specialists needed
for the two-shift organization customary in opera
tions. Tractor operators, for example, should know
how to operate cranes; headquarters personnel should
be capable of operating construction equipment and
trained in the use of crew-served weapons. All bat
talion personnel should be able to drive vehicles up
to and including dump trucks.
c. This training may be accomplished by battalion
schools, on-the-job training, and self-study. If pos
sible, four or five trained men should be available for
every essential specialist or supervisory position in
the battalion.
251. Specialized Unit Training
a. In the posteycle period, training is given in spe
cial operations. This includes jungle, arctic, and
counterguerilla operations, as well as security
measures against chemical, biological, and radiologi
cal attack. The subjects emphasized will depend

245
upon the probable employment of the battalion in
future amphibious operations, and the known ca
pabilities of the most likely enemy.
5. All unit personnel receive orientation in radi
ological defense. Unit radiological specialists re
ceive additional instruction in schools conductedjjy
the battalion or by higher headquarters. In addition
to the required indoctrination programs, commanders
discuss the problems of radiological defense in troop
information programs and similar conferences.
Every effort is made to instill a proper respect for
atomic weapons, while refuting irresponsible and
misleading rumors.
252. Staff Training
a. Map maneuvers and command post exercises
are conducted by the amphibious support brigade and
regiment to develop and maintain the proficiency of
unit staffs. Staff training is conducted concurrently
with general training of the battalion throughout all
phases, with the following objectives:
(1) Proficiency in amphibious planning tech
niques.
(2) Familiarization of staff members with the
duties and functions of other staff members
in amphibious operations.
(3) Familiarization with the relationships, or
ganization, duties, and functions of cor
responding staffs in the infantry division,
amphibious support brigade and regiment,
Navy, and Air Force organizations.
5. Through schools, conferences, command post ex
ercises, and problems, the battalion commander in-

246
sures that his staff maintains its proficiency in
preparing plans, orders, estimates, and loading
forms, and in the staff duties required by shore party
operations. This refresher staff training is sched
uled in the postcycle period with particular empha
sis given to the staff problems that will be met in the
probable theater of operations.

Section II. OPERATIONAL SHORE PARTY TRAINING

253. General
a. When the landing force is formed for a particu
lar operation, the units comprising it must undergo
a period of amphibious training prior to embarka
tion. A minimum of 60 days is desirable to train
troops who have had no previous amphibious experi
ence. Experienced troops also require refresher
training and replacements who have joined units
since the last amphibious operation must be trained
to the required standards of proficiency.
&. ,The engineer shore battalion is reinforced to
form a shore party for the planned operation, and
must conduct a training program that will integrate
the task organization into an efficient team. As soon
as the various units are assembled under the control
of the shore party commander, training of the op
erational shore party begins. Normally, this will be
at least 45 days prior to embarkation.
c. Before being assembled for operational training,
the units comprising the newly-formed shore party
should have completed basic amphibious training.
The operational shore party training program is
designed to provide the special training required for
the projected operation and to conduct any additional
247
training that may be necessary. Shore party exer
cises are conducted until the shore party can function
as a coordinated unit.
d. Units habitually attached to the shore party
should include training in their shore party duties
in basic unit training programs. The engineer shore
battalion commander may provide instructors for this
training.
254. Responsibilities
a. Since the majority of the organic and attached
units in the shore party will have beach duties during
the operation, the engineer shore battalion com
mander conducts the greater portion of the training
during this period.
&. When the shore party is formed, the battalion
commander normally will receive a complete and
approved training prqgram covering the entire pre-
embarkation period. This program usually will
have been prepared with the advice and assistance of
his staff. Training will be based upon the actual
conditions to be met in the landing. For security
reasons, published training programs often extend
T>eyond the actual date of embarkation.
255. Training Facilities
a. Sites. Desirable natural facilities for a shore
party training site are—
(1) Sand beach, with a frontage of not less than
one mile and a slope of five percent under
water minimum.
(2) Normal surf, between two to six feet.
(3) Maneuver terrain, preferably wooded, be
hind the beach.
248
 (4) Small harbor, providing anchorage and
wharfage for landing ships and craft, with
entrance and anchorage depths of not less
than 21 feet, and an anchorage area of at
least 30 acres.
(5) A maintenance beach, free from surf at all
times, with 300 feet for each transportation
boat battalion taking part in training.
(6) An area for the housing and training of all
troops in the shore party.
5. Aids. In addition to the customary training
aids, terrain models of the beach area, mockups of
ships and landing craft, and dummy cargo items are
valuable in shore party training. A typical beach
area may be laid out on the terrain, with actual ob
stacles and installations, and used for training exer
cises, trucks being employed to simulate landing
craft. Troops carry out such normal missions as
obstacle and mine clearance, construction of landing
slots and roads, establishment of traffic circulation
and control, and the operation of supply points and
evacuation stations.
256. Conduct of Training
Operational shore party training progresses from
the individual to the BLT, EOT, and division shore
party. Each individual is first taught his task in
the beach operation. Then each shore party head
quarters conducts separate training exercises until
they can function effectively.
257. Schools
a. Special schools or courses of instruction are
conducted to prepare individuals of the shore party
249
for their particular duties during the projected op
eration. These schools are devoted to such subjects
as communications, waterproofing, and loading tech
niques. Instructors may come from the engineer
shore battalion, the amphibious support brigade or
regiment, the landing force, or the Navy, depending
upon the subjects taught.
&. A general school is conducted for all members
of the shore party, covering such subjects as—
(1) Naval customs and terminology.
(2) Naval organization, including the com
mand and administrative organization of
naval vessels.
(3) Outline of amphibious force organization.
(4) Characteristics of transports, landing craft,
and landing ships.
(5) Loading and unloading of vessels.
(6) Preparation of equipment and supplies for
water movement.
c. Staff officers receive additional school instruc
tion in the preparation and interpretation of terrain
analyses and beach studies, meteorological and hy-
drographic data, intelligence sources, and counter-
intelligence measures. Joint command post exer
cises are conducted under the direction of the land
ing force commander. These CPX's test control and
communication procedures, and emphasize such de
tails as record and report requirements, terrain an
alysis, reconnaissance, beach capacity estimates, and
resupply planning.
d. Communications officers and section chiefs
usually attend a communications school conducted

250
by the amphibious support brigade or regiment.
The course of instruction covers—
(1) Amphibious communication plans and
orders.
(2) Communication equipment—waterproofing,
testing, calibration, loading and unloading.
(3) Communication requirements during each
phase of the landing operation.
(4) Communication security.
(5) Radio and wire nets maintained during
beach operations.
(6) Authentication.
(7) Joint procedure.
(8) Beachhead wire installation.
(9) Message center operation.
(10) Cryptographic systems.
258. Training Phases
a. Operational shore party training includes both
shore-based and ship-based phases.
Z>. Shore-based training is directed toward teach
ing each individual the tasks he must perform in the
landing and to develop teamwork among all elements
of the shore party.
c. Ship-based training acquaints the individual
with shipboard routine and provides practical ap
plication of the subjects covered in the shore-based
phase.
259. Shore-Based Training
All training that does not require assault shipping
is conducted in the shore-based phase, including in
doctrination, individual and unit training, refresher
staff training, and special amphibious training
251
schools. When such additional facilities as boat
pools, landing craft, or landing ships are available,
they are utilized for unit problems. Shore-based
training, however, is conducted largely by the use
of mockups and similar training aids.
260. Ship-Based Training
a. After shore-based training is completed, ship-
based training begins under the direction of the
landing force headquarters.
&. Elementary ship-based training employs assault
shipping. Units conduct debarkation drills; wave
drills; abandon ship, general quarters, antiaircraft
and administrative drills.

252
 APPENDIX I

TYPICAL SHORE PARTY ORGANIZATIONS

1. Echelonmeni
a. Shore party operations, and the development
of the beach support area, generally become more
efficient as control is centralized in progressively
higher shore party echelons. Consequently, such
consolidation, is planned and executed as rapidly as
the tactical situation permits. In the process, detach
ments with shore party platoons and companies are
returned to their parent units, to restore normal unit
command and responsibility.
~b. While typical reinforcing detachments for
shore platoons and companies are shown here, the
requirements of the specific operation will determine
the units, and their strength, that are attached to a
shore party. For example, in a regimental landing,
with BLT's passing in column over the same beach,
there is little need for dump operating or service
detachments at the BLT shore party level. The
organizations illustrated are based on a division
landing with two ECT's abreast, each RCT landing
with two BLT's abreast.
2. Corps Shore Party

Figure 28 illustrates the composition of a typical

corps shore party. Command lines are drawn to show
the maximum consolidation, under favorable condi
tions for centralization of control. When physical
conditions make this degree of consolidation imprac-

253
 Cor
Amph ° Auqmentriiion

-'I '" 1 1 1
Trans
Tr.ns
HO*H, M°£ Har Cft Bt Waint
C° Co Co Bn

1 kill
1—————————"-] Eng, Fid 5ig 9M Med
Co | 1 Co Det
1 ,„,, "-'^
L Spt Re?)

1 1 1

Ho. HSS Trans Sfc E"9' Med Det

Co Boat Bn

Note: Engineer ,
combat bottal ons f ^ ^^^ •»»• ^
arc assumed to • •
have reverted ,o * 1 '
corps m ssion* i^ava 1 yM
at this itage Be«h P«'*y s« Co

• • • •

Tram Enor L Trans Amph M«J

Port Bn Equip Co Trl Co Clr Co

Units attached ••• B^I^ iMi^

Unih normally attached

j "T" T" T
CA S * 1 1——————————"l Ord BD 1 f-—————————H
T m 1 | M? ' *«* | [ I Ord

• • p
i———i———"n Depot VM "n 1 nu B
"« Units
HqSH, Det | H ^D,,
T a" Tech Svc

.— --i
• •
i
•
————hi—————H
II Trans M QM Petrl M pM Subs M PM
T_ Trk Co T. Sup Co T. Sup Co l_ Svc Co

Units frequently attached

r "•" ^f™ T
| At"1 «g- AF S.c
Unit
PM Sr
*«9 Co

Figure 88. Type corps shore party.

154
 Div SP
Amph Spt Regt

1
r 1 | 1 1
Engr Hq. HSS Med Det

-I Shore Bn Boat Bn

i
r
i
Co, Trans
Boat Main!
T
Hq. HSS
Co
i
Trans
H Med
Det
Bn |ASB| Boat Co (ASR]

1 1
Med
Hq. HSS Eng, Det
Co Shore [ASK)
Co

L - - - " -f" -1--1

"- •» Units attached
1 1 1
Nava Engr
Beach E.gr S
Combat 1 Tear n
Group Bn

1 ill 1
Med Plat 1 MedS up PW Guard
Clr Co Amb Co Tejn Det
1
1
r
J_ 1 1
MP Plat Ord Det Ord Ord Ammo EOD
Co Maint Co 1 Dep Co Sup Det Sqd
(AS8|
1

r
1 1 1 1
Cml Cml Sup 1 QM Salv
Det Siq Sig Sup
Smoke Coll
Co (ASB| Det
Genr Co 1 Team

1
r
i 1 1 1 1

i
Pl.t QM Hq. HiS Co Det QM Hq » Hq
Plat QM
Subs Sup Tran> Port HqSHq Co Det Trans
Petrl Co
Co Trl Bn

\~
1 1

Trani T™' Amph

QM Svc
Port Co Trk Co
Co
Type A Co

Figure 29. Type division shore party.

255
ticable, the amphibious support regiments may re
tain control of dump operating units, land transpor
tation units, and similar service organizations.
3. Division Shore Party
A typical division shore party is shown in figure
29. It will be seen that the engineer shore battalion*
is primarily concerned with control, engineer, and
transfer operations in the beach area, while related
hatch crew and lighterage functions, dump opera
tions, and area services are directly under regimental
supervision.
4. RCT Shore Party
In figure 30, the composition of a typical RCT
shore party is shown, including elements for the
operation of supply dumps. This grouping of units,
with the shore company as a nucleus, is designed to
support the separate operations of a regimental com
bat team until a consolidated division beach support
area is established.
5. BLT Shore Party
The composition of a typical BLT shore party is
illustrated in figure 31. With the shore platoon as
a nucleus, this grouping of units is designed to sup
port a BLT during the earliest phase of a landing
operation. Specialists to supervise supply dumps,
other than ammunition, are not provided. In a typi
cal operation, BLT supply personnel and engineer
shore party personnel can supervise the BLT dumps
during the period when the BLT shore party is
operating separately.

256
 RCT
Shore
Party

1
1 1 1
1 1

S IQ Shorn
Plat
ftW
1
-1 1
1
PW I-
J-.
1
H

!
Det Engr
.. H< l[
S.o

T"
^
N.,,, Beach °o* ™Sr PUI. Med Plal
Party S,oup fh°',f£ Clr Co MP Co

r —————i—— +•
• ^ • •
Plat De» Ord"* Det*
Plai* Ord
Engr Malnt Co QM Co Ammo Co
Co (Cl IASB) IASBI

r ..l."™1
PM
MCo Svc Co

1
1
•
uer VMT
1
Det Armor Det <?M"
Amlrack Pelrl Subi
Co Co Sup Co

I Unitj aHached

* Attached only when lateral contact between

Shore Party Groups during the assault is
not assured.

Figure 30. Type RCT shore party.

30-3040—34- 257
 BLT
Shore
Party

-1-
1
""1

Plat Hq
[I

A.

V--

——— -
•
Naval Beach Det. Equip I Comm Det Det
Party Team Rep Plat Engr MP Co
Engr Shore C . Shore Co

^ ^
Det
Engr Del' Ord QM Svc Det. Mod
Ammo Co Plat Clr Co
Co|C|

•^H ••• •••Units attached

•Attached only when lateral contact between Shore

Party Team* during the atieutt is not allured.

Figure 31. Type BLT sliore party.

6. Command and Staff Organization

a. The need for precise coordination of diverse but
interdependent activities in shore party operations
requires a clear and simple command structure at
each echelon. In addition to providing command
and control during the assault landing, the shore
party staff must insure control of these major re-
supply activities—
(1) Planning the reception and cargo discharge
of resupply ships.
(2) Lighterage (coordination with naval control
or direct control of Army lighters).
(3) Hatch operations.
(4) Shoreline transfer.
(5) Land transportation.
(6) Dump operations.
258
 (7) Engineer construction and maintenance.
(8) Miscellaneous services (as HP's, medical,
civil affairs).
b. Staffs are augmented by using the commanders
of attached units in a dual staff and command role.
For ^sample, the commander of a transportation
port unit serves as a staff officer for planning the
discharge of resupply ships and preparing necessary
reports. Particular care must be taken to avoid
burdening the limited S4 sections with full responsi
bility for operating dumps and controlling trans
portation.

259
 APPENDIX II

SAMPLE DIVISION SHORE PARTY PLAN

20th Inf Div

ALGIERS, ALGERIA

(Date)
Annex 7 to Operation Order (Plan) 1
Maps: ITALY, 1:50,000, ALTAV1LIA-AGROPOLI
ITALY, 1:25,000, AGROPOLI
ITALY, 1:10,000, TRINITY Beach Area
(Mosaic)
TASK ORGANIZATION (Appendix A.)
1. a. Annex 2, Intelligence.
b. Own situation:
(1) (Lists pertinent information pertaining to
the friendly forces involved.)
(2) Hydrography and terrain.
(Includes information on the beaches,
hydrographic conditions, road nets,
hinterland, etc., that will affect shore
party operations.)
(3) Beaches (See Appendix B).
(A detailed beach study, usually ob
tained from naval sources, is included
as an appendix.)
2. 20th Inf Div shore party lands on beaches RED
and GREEN and provides initial logistical support
for the division, develops beaches, unloads and seg
regates troops, supplies, and equipment, and provides
beach defense for the beach support areas.
260
3. a. Shore Party, EOT 58.
(1) Land on RED beaches as directed.
(2) Initiate beach development projects in
accordance with division shore party beach
development plan (Appendix C).
b. -Shore Party, EOT 60.
Same as Shore Party, EOT 58, except land
on GEEEN beaches,
c. Shore Party, EOT 59.
(1) Embark with EOT 60 (Div Res).
(2) Be prepared to land on order in whole or in
part on either beach RED or beach
GEEEN to reinforce Shore Party, EOT 58
or Shore Party EOT 59.
d. Division shore party headquarters land on
beaches RED or GREEN on order.
e. Transportation boat battalion:
*****
x. (1) Construction and work priorities (Appen
dix D).
(2) Water will not be issued from water points
until directed by division surgeon.
(3) Standing Operating Procedure 503d Amph
Spt Brig—Shore Party Operations.
4. a. Equipment and supplies. See Administrative-
Order _, 512th Amph Spt Rgt.
6. Reports and records.
(1) Reports to this headquarters—standing
operating procedure.
(2) Special reports—Administrative Order _,
20th Inf Div.
c. Other administrative details.
(1) Administrative Order _, 512th Amph Spt
Regt.
261
 (2) Administrative Order _, 20th Inf Div.
(3) Annex _ to Administrative Order _,
Unloading Plan.
5. a. Command post.
(1) Afloat—Annex 4 to Administrative Order
_, Embarkation Plan.
(2) Ashore—to be reported.
(3) Tentative command post locations will be
reported to this headquarters by shore
party commanders prior to embarkation.
b. Signal Operations Instructions.
Commander

APPENDIXES: A—__ Task Organization.

B—Beach Study.
C—Beach Development Plan.
D—Construction and Work Pri
orities.
E—Special List of Equipment.
F—Beach Support Area Defense
Plan.
(Classification)

262
 APPENDIX III
CHARACTERISTICS OF SHIPS AND CRAFT EMPLOYED IN AMPHIBIOUS OPERATIONS
(The data given are average and are to be used for planning purposes only.)

(0 (2) (3) (« (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)

Symbol or name Dimensions Speed (knots) Operating range (miles) Personnel carrying Equipment and lauding Method of transport
capacity (noncrew) craft capacity Cargo capacity to far shore Surf limitations Remarks

APA ..... 14.—————— ujm.. ........ ......... 1,200..———————— 22 LCVP's and 2 LCM's.
Draft: 25' 6).
AKA ... ..... Length: 460' 14—— ————— 15,000 _ — .. —— ..-— 200.— .................... 16 LCVP's and 8 LCM's. assault operations.
Draft: 26' 6).
LSD.. ................ _ Length: 457'-9" 14..—————— 7,400 at 14 knots——— ... 332————————— — amphibious assault operations.
Draft: (6)'s or 41 LVT's or 47 DUKW's.
Forward: 15'-5>£" used to transport landing vehicles and landing craft to the assault
Aft: 16'-2" area. It does not beach to discharge its craft. Capacity on some
Well draft: has been increased by adding one or two decks above the well deck.
Forward: 8'-l"
Aft: 9'-ll"
LST.. —— ——— __ — Length: 328' 9——— ...... — .. 2 to 6 LCVP's; 60 vehicles total of
Draft-landing: fewer than 200 men. TANK DECK: 17 32-ton tanks equipment in column 6, or
Forward: 5' beach for dry landing. interconnected by either a ramp or an elevator. Sectional pontons
or 10 46-ton tanks or' 17 LVT's 1,600-1,900 long tons for may be carried on each side to be used as causeways on shallow
Aft: 13' or 22 DUKW's. Weather deck: ocean-going only (including beaches.
25 other vehicles under 10 tons equipment in col. 6).
each.
LCU._.--_ ...-...-- Length: 120' 6—— ... .... ——— 1,200 at 6 knots— .... _
Draft: Unloading is difficult in
Forward: 3'-6" 9 2}£-ton trucks. LST or LSD well deck. more than 3 feet of surf. not suited for long ocean voyages. Principal uses are as a lighter
Aft: 4'-0" in unloading cargo ships and to carry heavy equipment In shore-to-
shore amphibious operations. Eemoval of stern bulkhead permits
LCTJ to be used as a floating causeway for discharge of LST's and
LCM (6)— ...... — — Length: 56'
LSM's.*»
8...__ ....... ——
Draft Goaded): tances with no other row blade or 1 2-ton truck with ity).
Forward: 3'-0" or AKA or well deck of than 3-foot surf. assault for landing high priority vehicles and equipment. After
cargo. 1-ton trailer. LSD.
Aft: 4'-0" the assault, used as lighters to unload cargo shipping. Troops are
LC VP_. ...... ......... 9————— ——— _ 102.——————————— to be ferried for short distances only.
Draft: no cargo. in col. 6).
Forward: 2'-2" APA, AKA, or LSD. Should not be used to unload cargo after the assault because they
Aft: 3'-0" are very fragile.**
DUKW—— ........... Length: 31'
Width: 8'-3"*
or 12 occupied Utters. ideal sea and surf condi over 15 mph the efficiency or in water. Utilize as a waterborne cargo carrier and keep land
tions 5 tons (includes of the DUKW decreases. travel to a minimum. Excellent for cargo in nets, palletized, or
equipment In col. 6). With skilled operators, packaged in drums or barrels. Has no ramp, so cranes or A-frames
can be landed in a 6-6 foot are necessary for unloading If cargo is too heavy to be man-handled.
length: 17' surf. See FM 55-150 for other details.
Width: 7'-6" 9,000 Ibs...- ____ ........
trailer.
craft or amphibious ve In assault landing. Can be towed on land as well as in water.
LVT (4).. ............. Length: 26' hicles.
Width: 10'-7" 20 mph-land. or 9 occupied litters. to col. 6). or LSD or hold and decks sents serious hazards. marily an assault vehicle and best utilized on rocky, flat, or coral
or cargo ships. beaches for landing troops and high priority equipment. Valuable
for operations over lakes and marshes. Has stern ramp for dis
charging troops and cargo. High maintenance rate makes it an
inefficient cargo carrier after the assault. See FM 17-34 for other
LVT (A) (5). .......... details.
0..—— ......... .......... 0~— ——,——— ———— — 0—— ....... ......... ........ Lower deck LST or LSV
Width: 10'-8" 20 mph-land. or LSD or hold and deck sents serious hazards. Armored and mounts a 75-mm howitzer and 3 caliber .30 machine
of cargo ships. guns. Employed in support of infantry in amphibious operations.
Carries a 6-man crew and 1 ton of ammunition and gear. See
FM 17-34 for ot)ier details.
i
•No consideration need be made for the draft of amphibious vehicles.
"For further details see FM 60-5

305840—54 (Face p. 262)

 APPENDIX IV
SUGGESTED FORM FOR SHORE PARTY SOP

(FM 5-6 contains an outline for a functional SOP

which may be adapted to cover the routine opera
tions of the engineer shore battalion.)
(Unit Hq.)

(Date)
GENERAL
(States the purpose of the SOP and refers to the
applicable SOP of the higher headquarters.)
ORGANIZATION
(Gives the type units and detachments that nor
mally will comprise the division shore party,
RCT and BLT shore parties. Specific composi
tion and strength of these organizations are
announced for each operation.)
PERSONNEL
(Matters relating to personnel administration,
conduct, and discipline.)
INTELLIGENCE
(Sources, channels, and procedures.)
OPERATIONS
a. Training (requirements; responsibilities of
commanders; schools and other facilities).
b. Preembarkation (liaison; planning duties;
assistance in embarkation of landing force).
c. Movement (duties of personnel; refers to a
Loading Plan Annex).
d. Operations in objective area (specific func
tions of BLT, RCT, and the division shore
parties on the far shore, presented in detail).
263
6. LOGISTICS
(Normal supply logistical responsibilities and pro
cedures in a typical operation.)
7. COMMAND
(Command responsibilities at each echelon.)
Commanding
Annexes: 1-Recommended loading plan for BLT,
ECT, and division shore parties.
Other annexes considered appropriate.

264
 APPENDIX V

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

(Additional terms used in amphibious operations are

denned in SR 320-5-5, Dictionary of United States
Military Terms for Joint Usage.)
Advance force—That part of the amphibious task
force which precedes the main body to the ob
jective area. The advance force usually is dis
solved on D-day and redistributed to other parts
of the amphibious task force.
AH—-Navy symbol for a hospital ship.
AK—Navy symbol for a cargo ship.
AKA—Navy symbol for a cargo ship, attack, a ves
sel capable of combat unit loading.
Amphibious assault—-That part of an amphibious
operation starting with the arrival of the attack
forces in the landing area, and terminating when
the assault troops have established a beachhead
ashore.
Amphibious command ship (AGO)—A naval vessel
from which a commander exercises control in
amphibious operations. It is designed primarily
to fulfill communication requirements for con
trol of surf ace, subsurface, and air units engaged
in the landing and supporting of landing forces.
It provides planning and supporting facilities,
such as aerological, photographic, and map re
production equipment.
Amphibious forces—1. A general term used to de
scribe the naval forces and landing forces, to
gether with supporting forces, that are organ-
265
 ized, equipped, and trained to conduct an am
phibious operation.
2. In naval usage, the administrative title of the
amphibious type command of a fleet. An am
phibious force consists of an amphibious force
staff, subordinate amphibious group staffs,
transport squadron, transport division, and other
amphibious staff organizations, amphibious type
vessels, close support ships, amphibious training
command, and other organizations whose mis
sions are primarily of an amphibious nature or
in support thereof, such as underwater demoli
tion teams and naval beach groups.
Amphibious operation—1. An attack launched from
the sea by naval and landing forces involving
a landing on a hostile shore for the purpose of
(1) obtaining a lodgment area from which to
carry out further combat operations ashore;
(2) obtaining an advanced air or naval base area;
and (3) denying the use of seized positions to
the enemy.
2. A tactical withdrawal of troops from land,
affected by naval forces, either for the purpose
of redeployment or for evacuation of the objec
tive area.
Amphibious task force—A temporary grouping of
units of two or more services under a single
commander, organized for the purpose of en
gaging in an amphibious landing for assault on
hostile shores. (Previously called joint expedi
tionary force.)
Amphibious vehicle—A wheel or track-laying vehi
cle capable of operating on both land and water.

766
Amtank—An amphibious tank capable of operating
both on land or in water.
Amtrac (Amtrack)—An amphibious full-track ve
hicle capable of operating both on land and in
water (LVT, Alligator).
AP—Navy symbol for a troop transport.
APA—Navy symbol for an attack transport capable
of combat unit loading and of transporting an
assault battalion landing team.
APD—Navy symbol for a destroyer-type high speed
transport.
Approach schedule—See Schedule, approach.
Area, beach support—The area to the rear of a land
ing force or elements thereof, established and
operated by shore party units, which contains
the facilities for the unloading of troops and
materiel, and the support of forces ashore; it
includes facilities for the evacuation of wounded,
prisoners of war, and captured material.
Area, embarkation—An area ashore, including a
group of embarkation points, in which final
preparations for embarkation are completed, and
through which assigned loads for craft and ships
are called forward to embark.
Area, mounting—A general locality where assigned
forces of an amphibious operation, with their
equipment, are assembled, prepared, and loaded
in shipping preparatory to an assault.
Area, objective—A denned geographical area within
which is located the objective to be captured or
reached by the military forces. This area is
denned by competent authority for purposes of
command and control.

267
Area, rendezvous—In an amphibious operation, the
area in which the boats rendezvous after being
loaded and prior to movement to the line of
departure.
Area, staging—A general locality between the mount
ing area and the objective of an amphibious ex
pedition, through which the expedition or parts
thereof pass after mounting, for refueling, re
grouping of ships, and/or exercise, inspection
and redistribution of troops.
Area, transport—A sea area, in the proximity'of the
landing beaches for an amphibious assault, for
transport unloading operations.
Outer—The area which is used for unload
ing operations during the initial phases
of the assault and which is located inside
the air-sea defense perimeter, but out
side the effective range of enemy shore
batteries.
Inner—The area where most of the unload
ing is accomplished, located as near the
beach as conditions permit. Normally,
the transport group moves into the
inner transport area after the probabil
ity of enemy interference is reduced.
Assault craft—A landing craft or amphibious ve
hicle employed for landing troops and equipment
in an assault or on an enemy beach.
Assault echelon—That part of an attack force which
arrives in the landing area with the initial as
sault troops.
Assault lift—The total capacity of assault-type ship
ping used in an amphibious operation expressed

268
 in terms of personnel, vehicles, and measurement
(or weight) tons of supplies. Also called am
phibious lift.
Assault loaves—In an amphibious operation, the
scheduled boat waves in the approach to the
beach whose time of landing is fixed in relation
to H-hour.
Attack force—A subdivision of a joint expeditionary
force consisting of assault shipping with em
barked troops and supporting naval and air
units, operating to establish a landing force on
shore and support its operations thereafter.
Also called a joint attack force.
Attack transport—A naval ship designed for com
bat loading a battalion landing force with its
essential combat equipment and supplies, and
having the facilities, including landing craft, for
transporting them to the beach.
Base—A locality from which operations are pro
jected or supported.
Base development—The improvement and expansion
of the resources and facilities of an area to sup
port military operations. It provides the
framework for the logistic support of combat
forces deployed in accordance with the strategic
war plans.
Battalion landing team—See Landing team, battal
ion (BLT).
Beach—The area extending from the shoreline in
land to a marked change in the physiograph
form of material, or to the line of permanent
vegetation (coastline). (In a landing, each
RCT beach is given a color designation, and sub-

269
 divisions are numbered from left to right as one
faces the beach from the sea.)
Beach capacity—An estimate, expressed in terms of
measurement or weight tons, of the cargo that
may be unloaded on a designated strip of shore
per day. The estimate is based on an evaluation
of the physical characteristics of the shore in
relation to the sea, tide, and weather expectancy.
The estimate is without reference to the storage
capacity behind the beach area. See clearance
capacity.
Beach dump—An area adjacent to a beach utilized
by a shore party for the temporary storage of
supplies.
Beach exit—A route for inland movement of person
nel and materiel from a landing beach; includes
entrances to the beach for returning vehicles.
Beach group, naval—In an amphibious operation, a
permanently organized naval unit consisting of
a headquarters unit, beachmaster unit, amphib
ious construction battalion, underwater demoli
tion unit, and boat unit, designed to provide an
administrative group from which the required
components may be drawn to form (1) elements
for accomplishment of certain pre-D-day and
D-day missions; (2) an element to support a
shore party; (3) a naval task component to
which may be attached other naval units to per
form tasks afloat or ashore in the objective area.
Beachhead—A designated area on a hostile shore
which, when seized and held, insures the con
tinuous landing of troops and materiel, and
provides maneuver space requisite for subsequent

270
 projected operations ashore. It is the physical
objective of an amphibious operation.
Beachhead line (BHL)—An objective for fixing the
limits of a beachhead; a tentative main line of
resistance based, if practicable, on terrain fea
tures which can be defended against enemy coun
terattack prior to advance out of the beachhead.
Beach marker—A. sign or device used to identify a
beach or certain activities thereon, for incoming
waterborne traffic. Markers may be panels,
lights, buoys, or electronic devices.
Beach party—The naval component of the shore
party which provides close off-shore control to
facilitate beaching of landing craft, landing
ships, and amphibious vehicles. It assists as
required in the retraction and salvage of landing
craft and landing ships, and provides facilities
for communicating with the naval forces afloat.
Beach support area—See Area, beach support.
Billet—An assignment of quarters and duties aboard
a naval ship.
Block shipment—See Shipment, block.
Boat—Navy term used to describe any small craft
capable of being carried aboard a ship.
Boat assembly area—A water area adjacent to a ship
(or elsewhere) in which boats assemble prior to,
or after, ferrying troops and materiel ashore.
Boat assignment table—A table showing the assign
ment of all personnel and materiel to boats for
the ship-to-shore movement.
Boat group—The landing craft organization for
landing a battalion landing team. It also de
notes the landing craft carried by an attack
transport.
271
Boat pool—Additional boats available to transports
to aid or replace boats which become inopera
tive prior to or during an amphibious operation.
Boat space—The space and weight factor used to
determine the capacity of boats and landing
craft. With respect to landing craft, it is based
on the requirements of one man with his indi
vidual equipment. He is assumed to weigh 224
pounds and to occupy 13.5 cubic feet of space.
Boat team—A subordinate unit of the landing team,
constituted to function from the predebarkation
phase of the landing until normal unit organiza
tion has been established ashore. It is the per
sonnel, with their equipment, loaded in one land
ing boat or amphibious vehicle charged with the
performance of a task after landing.
Boat wave—The craft which transport the troops that
are to land approximately simultaneously.
Buildup—The process of attaining prescribed
strengths of units and levels of supply. Also
may be applied to the means of accomplishing
this process.
GA—Navy symbol for heavy cruiser.
Cargo classification (combat loading)—The division
of military cargo into categories for combat load
ing aboard ships. They are as follows:
Vehicles—Wheeled or tracked equipment,
including weapons, which require cer
tain deck space, headroom, and other
definite clearance.
General—Cargo which is susceptible of load
ing in any place, such as boxes, bales,
barrels, crates, packages, bundles, and
pallets.
272
 Perishables—Cargo requiring refrigeration,
such as meat, fruit, and fresh vegeta
bles, and medical department biologi-
cals.
High explosives—Cargo such as artillery
ammunition, bombs, depth charges, and
demolition material.
Flammables—Cargo such as drummed gaso
line and oils.
Chemical ammunition—Cargo such as white
phosphorous smoke.
/Special—Cargo which requires special han-
ling or protection, such as pyrotechnics,
detonators, watches, and precision in
struments.
Troop space—Cargo such as sea or barracks
bags, bedding, rolls or hammocks, locker
trunks, and office equipment, which is
normally stowed in an accessible place.
Cargo, flatted (also called understo^oed by Navy)—
Cargo placed in the bottom of the holds, covered
with planks and dunnage, and held for future
use. Flatted cargo usually has room left above
it for the loading of vehicles which may be moved
without interfering with the flatted cargo.
Frequently, flatted cargo serves in lieu of bal
last.
Cargo and loading analysis—A form prepared from
the consolidated unit personnel and tonnage table
of a landing force element, listing all cargo by
organization, number of containers, type of
equipment and supplies, weight, cubic measure,
and where stowed. Also called a cargo list.
Cargo ship, attack—See AKA.
305640—54———18 273
 Cargo ticket—In amphibious operations, a form car
ried by the coxswain of a landing craft or vehicle
transporting supplies, listing the craft's cargo,
source of load, destinations, and any other per
tinent information.
Chart, hydrographic—A chart showing depths of
water, nature of bottom, contours of bottom, and
tides and currents in a given sea or sea and land
area.
GL—Navy symbol for a light cruiser.
Clearance capacity—An estimate expressed in terms
of measurement or weight tons per day of the
cargo that may be transported inland from a
beach or port over the available means of inland
communication, including roads, railroads, and
inland waterways. The estimate is based on an
evaluation of the physical characteristics of the
transportation facilities in the area. See Beach
capacity, Port capacity.
Close covering group—A task designation for a group
of naval vessels formed to protect ships and
shore installations in the objective area against
enemy surface attack.
Coastal frontier—A geographical division of a
coastal area, established for organization and
command purposes in order to insure the effec
tive coordination of military forces employed in
military operations within the coastal frontier
area.
Combat cargo officer—An embarkation officer as
signed to major amphibious ships or naval staffs,
functioning primarily as an adviser to the naval
commander he serves. See Embarkation officer.

274
Combined force—A. military force composed of com
ponent units of two or more allied nations.
Combined operation—An operation conducted by
the forces of two or more allied nations acting
together for the accomplishment of a single
mission.
COMLANFOR—Commander, landing force; com
mander of the task organization of ground
troops equipped and trained to carry out an
amphibious assault landing.
Commercial loading—The loading of troops, and
equipment and supplies in a vessel for the maxi
mum utilization of personnel and cargo space.
Communications center—A communications agency
charged with the responsibility for receipt,
transmission, and delivery of messages. It nor
mally includes a message center, a cryptographic
section, transmitting facilities, and receiving
facilities. Transmitting, receiving, and relay
stations are not necessarily located in the com
munications center, but facilities for remote
control thereof must terminate there.
COMTRANSDIV—Commander, transport division.
COMTRANSGROUP—Commander, transport
group.
COMTRANSRON— Commander, transport squad
ron.
Condition 1A—Condition "One ABLE": that condi
tion of battle readiness on vessels carrying troops
or materiel for an amphibious landing when all
stations are fully manned for debarkation.
Consolidated vehicle taWe-~-See Table, consolidated
vehicle.

275
Control Cfroup—A naval task organization consist
ing of personnel, vessels, craft, boats, and the
necessary communication facilities to control
the ship-to-shore movement.
Control officer—A. naval officer, designated by the
attack force commander, charged with overall
supervision of the ship-to-shore movement.
Control vessel—A vessel, craft, or boat designated to
guide or control the movement of waterborne"
traffic to and from the beach.
Convoy—A group of ships or vehicles organized for
the purpose of control and orderly movement
with or without escort protection.
Convoy escort—Naval vessels or aircraft in company
with a convoy and responsible for its protection.
Convoy loading—The loading of troops, equipment,
and supplies on vessels in the same convoy but
not necessarily in the same ship.
GV—Navy symbol for aircraft carrier.
CVE—Navy symbol for escort aircraft carrier (has
a merchant ship hull).
CVL—Navy symbol for a light aircraft carrier built
on a light cruiser hull.
DCP-DUKW control point—A point located on or
near beach exits to control the shuttle movement
of amphibious trucks between ships and transfer
points on shore.
DD—Navy symbol for destroyer.
D-Day—A term used to designate the unnamed day
on which an initial assault landing is to be made.
Deadweight ton—See Tonnage.
Debarkation—The unloading of troops, equipment,
or supplies from a ship.

276
Debarkation net—A specially prepared type of cargo
net employed for the debarkation of troops over
the side of a ship.
Debarkation schedule—A form prepared by the BLT
showing the boat team number, its debarkation
station, the type of craft in which the boat team
embarks, and the time it reports to stations for
debarkation.
Debarkation station—A location definitely estab
lished at the rail of a ship where troops and
materiel load into boats for movement ashore.
There are usually four or more such stations on
each side of an APA.
Deck loading—See Bail loading.
Demonstration—1. An attack or a show of force on
a front where a decision is not sought, made
with the object of deceiving the enemy. 2. In
an amphibious operation, an exhibition of
force, conducted to give the impression to the
enemy that a landing is to be made in the vi
cinity ; may be limited to pre-D-day naval gun
fire ; or may be carried through all phases of an
amphibious operation and ship-to-shore move
ment to include the movement of landing craft
or amphibian vehicles from the line of departure
toward selected landing beaches.
Diagram, boat—In the assault phase of an amphibi
ous operation a diagram showing the positions
of individuals and equipment in each boat.
Diagram, deployment—In the assault phase of an
amphibious operation, a diagram showing the
formation in which the boat group proceeds
from the rendezvous areas to the line of depar-

277
 ture and the method of deployment into the land
ing formation.
Diagram, landing—In the assault phase of an am
phibious operation, a diagram which shows the
organization of the boat group and/or amphib
ian vehicles or landing ships for landing the
scheduled waves on a numbered beach; normally
prepared by a battalion landing team. It shows
the scheduled waves; the formation, number and
type of landing craft; amphibious vehicles or
landing ships in each wave; and the interval be
tween waves expressed in minutes.
Diagram, stowage—A scaled drawing included in
the loading plan of a vessel for each cargo stow
age space on each deck or platform showing the
exact location of all cargo within each hold. The
diagram also contains the following data for
each cargo space: overall dimensions, location
of obstructions, dimensions of the overhead
hatch opening, minimum clearances to the over
head, bale cubic capacity, square feet of deck
area, and the capacity of booms.
Distance—In naval usage, the space between adja
cent individual ships or boats measured in any
direction between foremasts.
DUKW—A 2%-ton, 6x6 truck, capable of operating
• on both land and water.
DUKW-Truck transfer point—A beach installation
consisting of revolving cranes or expedient hoist
ing devices, at which sling loads are transferred
from amphibious trucks into trucks for further
movement.
Dump—A temporary stock of supplies or a place of
storage established in the field or afloat where
278
 military supplies are held temporarily. When
supplies are issued from them, dumps may be
termed distributing points.
Dunnage-—Any material (boards, mats, planks,
blocks, bamboo, discarded fiber shell cases, etc.)
used in transportation and storage of supplies
to secure and protect them from damage, or for
convenience in handling.
Embarkation—The loading of troops with their sup
plies and equipment into vessels.
Embarkation area—An area ashore in which final
preparations are completed, and through which
troops and materiel for ships and craft are called
forward to embark.
Embarkation group—A temporary administrative
formation of personnel with supplies and equip
ment embarking or to be embarked (combat
loaded) aboard the ships of one transport unit
or similar naval organization. It is dissolved
upon completion of the embarkation.
Embarkation officer—A special officer serving on an
Army, Air Force or Marine staff who advises the
commander thereof about matters pertaining to
embarkation planning, loading, and embarkation
of the command ships. The designation of per
sonnel at specific command levels is accomplished
by an appropriate prefix to-the basic title, for
example, division embarkation officer, etc. See
Combat cargo officer.
Embarkation and tonnage table—A form showing
the allocation of embarkation groups to trans
port divisions. It is used to allocate space to
all elements of the landing force on ships of the
transport group.
279
Embarkation unit (team)—All personnel with sup
plies and equipment embarked or to be embarked
(combat loaded) aboard one ship.
Evacuation control vessel—In an amphibious opera
tion, a vessel designated as a control vessel for
landing craft, amphibious vehicles, and helicop
ters evacuating casualties from the beaches.
Medical personnel embarked in the evacuation
control vessel effect distribution of casualties
throughout the attack force in accordance with
ships' casualty capacities and specialized medical
facilities available, and also perform emergency
surgery.
Fathom—A measure of length equal to six feet.
Flagship—See AGO.
Fleet Marine Force—A balanced force of combined
arms comprising land, air, and service elements
of the United States Marine Corps. A Fleet
Marine Force is an integral part of a U.S. fleet
and has the status of a type command.
Floating dump—A dump of critical supplies held on
boats, barges, or landing vehicles established
afloat in the vicinity of a control vessel for quick
dispatch to assault troops ashore. Also called
offshore dump.
Follow-up forces—Those forces which are scheduled
to arrive in the objective area after the assault
and prior to the buildup forces.
Garrison force—All units assigned to a base or area
for defense, development, operation, and main
tenance of facilities.
Gross ton—See Tonnage.

280
H-Hour—The term customarily used to designate the
hour for an attack to be launched, for an assault
wave to land, for a movement to begin.
Harbor—A restricted body of water, an anchorage
or other limited coastal water area and its mine
able water approaches from which shipping op
erations are projected or supported. Generally,
a harbor is part of a base, in which case the
harbor defense force forms a component element
of the base defense force established for the
local defense of the base and its included harbor.
Hard—A. portion of a beach especially prepared
with a hard surface extending into the water,
employed for the purpose of loading or unload
ing directly into or from landing ships or land
ing craft.
Hardstand—1. A paved or stabilized area where
vehicles are parked. 2. Open ground area hav
ing a prepared surface and used for storage of
materiel.
Headquarters skip—See AGO.
Heavy-lift cargo—A heavy piece of cargo that re
quires a heavy-lift crane to raise and lower it.
Hold—A cargo stowage compartment aboard ship.
Horizontal loading—A method of loading whereby
items of like character are loaded in horizontal
layers throughout the hold or holds of a ship.
Hydro graphic section (beach party)—A section of a
beach party whose duties are to clear the beach
of damaged boats, conduct hydrographic recon
naissance, assist in removing underwater ob
structions, act as stretcher bearers, and furnish
relief boat crews.

28T
Hydrography—The science of determining the con
ditions of navigable waters. It includes a study
of the contours of the bottom, depths, shoals,
channels, tides, currents, obstructions, surf con
ditions, and other features.
Interval—In naval usage, the space between adjacent
groups of ships or boats measured in any direc
tion between the corresponding ships or boats
in each group.
Jaheemy—A large pneumatic-tired, wheeled salvage
vehicle fitted with blocks and tackle, used to lift
and move a landing craft out of the water and up
onto the beach.
•Joint Army - Nany - Air Force publications
(JANAP)—A series of publications produced
by supporting agencies of the Joint Chiefs of
Staff and intended for distribution through the
approved offices of distribution within the Army,
Navy, and Air Force.
Joint exercise—A simulated combat operation of
units of two or more services for purposes of
training, involving joint planning, preparation,
and execution.
Grand—An exercise, held by direction of
the Joint Chiefs of Staff, involving
major subdivisions from each of two or
more services.
Major—A large-scale joint maneuver held
on the initiative of one of the services
and in which two or more services
participate.
Minor—A joint training exercise held on
the initiative of one or more joint force

282
 commanders for the forces under their
respective commands; or a small-scale
training exercise held on the initiative
of one of the services, or a subordinate
commander thereof, and in which two
or more services participate.
Joint force—A general term applied to a force which
is composed of significant elements of the Army,
the Navy (Marine Corps), and the Air Force,
or any two of these services, operating under a
single commander authorized to exercise unified
command or operational control over such joint
forces.
Knot—A unit of speed equivalent to one nautical
mile (1.15 statute miles) per hour.
Landing area—That part of an objective area which
is included in the landing operations of a joint
task force. It includes the beaches and the ap
proaches thereto, transport areas, fire support
areas, the air occupied by close supporting air
craft, and the land included in the advance in
land to the initial objectives.
Landing craft (LC) —A shipborne craft employed
in amphibious assault • operations, specifically
designed for carrying troops and equipment and
for beaching, unloading, and retracting.
Landing craft availability table—A tabulation of all
landing craft available to transport troops and
materiel ashore. It is prepared by the transport
group (squadron) commander and submitted to
the landing force commander for planning.
Landing diagram—See Diagram, landing.
Landing1 force—A task organization of troops, in
cluding aviation units, especially organized,
283
 trained and equipped, assigned to carry out am
phibious operations against a position or group
of positions so located as to permit their seizure
by troops operating under a single tactical com
mand. Some of its elements may be transported
by air.
Landing schedule—A schedule which shows the
place, hour, and priorities of landing of assault
units, and which coordinates the movements of
landing craft to the beach to execute the planned
scheme of maneuver, and planned supporting
naval and air bombardment missions.
Landing ship—A large type of assault ship which
is designed for long sea voyages and for rapid
unloading over and onto a beach.
Landing team, battalion (BLT) —In an amphibious-
operation, an infantry battalion normally re
inforced by necessary combat and service ele
ments; the basic unit for planning an assault
landing.
Lift, amphibious—The total capacity of assault ship
ping utilized in an amphibious operation, ex
pressed in terms of personnel, vehicles, and
measurement or weight tons of supplies.
Loading analysis—See Cargo loading analysis.
LCG—Landing craft, control.
LCM—Landing craft, mechanized.
LCVP—Landing craft, vehicle, personnel.
LEX—Navy term for a practice landing exercise.
Lighterage—Barges and craft used in unloading and
loading vessels not lying at wharves and docks,
or in transporting freight about a harbor or
beach unloading area.

284
Line of departure—A suitably marked offshore co
ordinating line to assist assault landing craft to
land on designated beaches at scheduled times.
Loading:
Combat—The arrangement of personnel and the
stowage of equipment and supplies aboard
ship in a manner designed to conform to the
anticipated tactical operation of the organ
ization embarked. Each individual item of
equipment and supplies must be so stowed
aboard ship that it can be discharged and
dispatched to the beach at the time and in
the sequence which it has been previously
determined will most effectively promote the
successful completion of the mission. Also
called combat unit loading.
Commercial—The loading of troops and/or
equipment and supplies in a vessel for max
imum utilization of personnel and cargo
space.
Commodity—1. In naval usage, a method of
loading in which various types of cargo are
loaded together, such as ammunition, ra
tions, or boxed vehicles, in order that each
commodity can be discharged without dis
turbing the others. 2. In Army usage and
Air Force usage, the loading of a ship with
one class of supply or with supplies of a
single technical service.
Convoy—The loading of troop units with their
equipment and supplies in vessels of the
same movement group, but not necessarily
in the same vessel.

285
 Horizontal—A type of loading whereby items of
like character are loaded in horizontal layers
throughout the hold or holds of a ship.
Selective—The arrangement and stowage of
equipment and supplies aboard ship in a
manner designed to facilitate issues to units.
Unit-—The loading of troop units with their
equipment and supplies in the same vessel.
Vertical—A type of loading whereby items of
like character are loaded in vertical layers
throughout the hold or holds of a ship, so
that selected items are available at any stage
of the unloading.
Loading officer (LO)—The troop officer designated
to plan and supervise the loading and unloading
of troops, equipment, and supplies. Each unit
from division down to the BLT has an assigned
loading officer.
Loading point—Any location at which ships or land
ing vessels are loaded with personnel, supplies,
and equipment.
Lodgment area—That area, resulting from the con
solidation of one or more beachheads, which is
the initial base of operations required for the
support of extended land operations.
LSD—Landing ship, dock.
LSM—Landing ship, medium.
LST—Landing ship, tank.
LST (H)—Landing ship, tank (casualty evacua
tion) .
L8V—Landing ship, vehicle.
LVT—Landing vehicle, tracked.

286
Main landing—The landing upon which the ultimate
success of the operation depends. It envisages
the securing of a beachhead from which assault
forces can assume the offensive and continue op
erations inland against an active enemy.
Marker vessel—A vessel which takes accurate station
on a designated control point. It may fly identi
fying flags by day and show lights to seaward
at night.
Marshaling—The process by which units participat
ing in an amphibious operation move to tempo
rary camps in the vicinity of embarkation points,
complete preparations for combat, and prepare
for loading. See Stage.
Mean sea level (MSL)—The average height of the
surface of the sea for all stages of tide, used as
a reference for elevations throughout the United
States.
Measurement ton—See Tonnage.
Mine group—Task unit of a joint attack force as
signed the mission of laying and sweeping mines
in the objective area. Elements of the mine
group may be attached to the advance force.
Mounting—In an oversea expedition, all prepara
tions made in an area designated for this pur
pose, in anticipation of an amphibious operation.
It includes the assembly in the mounting area,
preparation and maintenance within the mount
ing area, movement to loading points and sub
sequent embarkation into ships and craft.
Night landing—A landing in which the troops are
scheduled to reach their first objective under
cover of darkness.

287
Objective area—A definite geographical area within
which is located the objective to be seized or
reached by the landing force.
Order, embarkation—An order specifying dates,
times, routes, and methods of movement to ship-
side for both personnel and impedimenta.
Pallet—A portable platform, usually 4x6 feet,
mounted on sled or toboggan runners upon which
materials are placed for convenient stowage and
handling.
Plan, stowage—A completed stowage diagram, show
ing what material has been loaded and its stow
age location in each hold, between-deck compart
ment, or other space in a ship including deck
space. Each port of discharge is indicated by
colors or other appropriate means. Deck and
between-deck cargo normally is shown in per
spective while cargo stowed in the lower hold is
shown in profile, except that vehicles are usually
shown in perspective regardless of stowage.
See Diagram, stowage.
Point, control—In amphibious operations, a position
marked by a buoy, boat, or small craft, as an aid
to navigation for the vessels and boats of the
attack force.
POL—A broad term which includes all petroleum
products used by the armed forces. It is an ab
breviation of "petroleum, oil, and lubricants."
Port capacity—An estimate of the amount of dry
cargo, usually expressed in weight or measure
ment tons per day, that can be discharged from
ships or lighters with available piers, wharves,
quays, jetties, moles, beaches, etc., of a port.

288
 The physical facilities of the port, including the
sheltered anchorage, determine the number and
size of vessels and the method of discharge, from
which the evaluation of capacity is estimated.
This estimate is based upon the evaluation of
the port facilities without reference to storage
or clearance capacities within or from the port.
Outloading dry cargo from a port is a slower
operation than discharging cargo. Therefore,
outloading is not synonymous with port capac
ity, but should be expressed as a percentage of
port capacity. See Clearance capacity.
Primary control vessel—Vessel used by the senior
naval officer in control of landing craft for a
transport squadron or transport division.
Raid—A sudden attack, usually by a small force hav
ing no intention of holding the territory in
vaded. A raid may be made by aircraft, fast
naval vessels, mobile ground forces, or amphibi
ous forces.
Rail loading—The loading of landing craft (boats)
while held in davits before lowering to the water.
Also called davit loading.
Reconnaissance group—A task organization of the
attack force designated to reconnoiter landing
areas prior to D-day. They may also locate
enemy naval forces, locate beaches, establish aids
to navigation, clear minefields, select suitable
targets for naval gunfire, clear beach approaches
of underwater obstacles, etc.
•Regimental combat team, (ROT)—A reinforced in
fantry regiment organized as a balanced fighting
force of essential arms.

305640—54———19 289
 Reserves, floating—In an amphibious operation, re
serve troops which remain embarked until
needed.
Resupplies—Supplies shipped to the objective area
to be used Avhen needed.
S-Day—Sailing date for a scheduled operation.
Salvage group—In an amphibious operation, a naval
task organization designated and equipped to
rescue personnel and to salvage equipment and
materiel.
Schedule, approach—In an amphibious operation,
a schedule prepared by the transport commander
in coordination with the battalion landing team
commander for the movement of each scheduled
wave of the boat group from the rendezvous
area to the line of departure and thence to the
assigned beach so that the landing of each wave
will be made at the prescribed time.
Scheme of maneuver—The tactical plan to be exe
cuted by a force in order to seize assigned ob
jectives.
Screening groups—A defensive unit of naval-vessels
employed to protect the attack force; it consists
of antisubmarine vessels, picket boats, etc., sea
ward from the transport and fire support areas.
Sea frontier—The naval command of a coastal fron
tier, including the coastal zone in addition to
the land area of the coastal frontier, and the
adj acent sea areas.
Secondary control vessel—Vessels used by naval
boat group and wave commanders and wave
guide officers.

290
Secondary landing—A landing usually made outside
the designated landing area, the purpose of
which is to support the main landing directly
• or indirectly.
Serial number:
Definition—Serial numbers are vised as a con
venient means of identifying elements of
the landing force and assisting in their con
trol during ship-to-shore movement. Serial
numbers are assigned to troop units (per
sonnel and their equipment), integral parts
of troop units, and composite groupings of
minor elements of the landing force. A
single grouping, including its equipment,
which for tactical or logistical reasons—
(1) Is embarked entirely in one ship;
(2) Is to be landed as a unit at one
beach; and
(3) Is to be landed at approximately
the same time.
Assignment—Serial number assignment is ex
tended to all landing force units and naval
components which are intended to land
prior to the commencement of general un
loading, including the scheduled and on-
call waves and nonscheduled units of the
division and corps. However, it should be
noted that serial numbers are generally as
signed to scheduled waves, but it is not re
quired. Floating dumps and landing force
supplies are not assigned serial numbers.
Shipment, Vlock—A method of shipment of supplies
to oversea areas to provide balanced stocks for

291
 an arbitrary balanced force for a specific num
ber of days, for example, shipment of 30 days'
supply for an average force of 10,000 individuals.
Shipping—A. term applied collectively to those ves
sels which are used to transport personnel or
cargo, or both, often modified to denote type,
use, or force to which assigned.
Shipping, assault—Those vessels which are utilized
for the rapid unloading, in the initial stages of
amphibious operations, of troops, vehicles, equip
ment, and supplies directly over the beaches, or
indirectly by discharging offshore into landing
craft or landing ships.
Ship ton—See Tonnage.
Ship-to-shore movement—That phase of an amphib
ious operation which pertains to the timely de
ployment of the landing force from the assault
shipping to the designated shore positions in
the landing area.
Shore party—A special task organization formed for
the purpose of facilitating the landing and
movement off the beaches of troops, equipment,
and landing force supplies, and for the evacu
ation from the beaches of casualties and pris
oners of war. It comprises elements of both the
naval and landing forces; its activation and
command are a function of the landing force.
Shore-to-shore movement—The assault movement of
personnel and materiel direct from a shore stag
ing area to the objective, involving no further
transfers between types of craft or ships inci
dent to the assault movement.

292
Stage—To process, in a specified area, troops which
are in transit from one locality to another. See
Area, staging.
Stevedore—A. firm or individual who contracts to
load or discharge vessels.
Storage capacity—An evaluation of the physical
capacity of ships, activity, or area, normally ex
pressed in measurement (or weight) tons, cubic
feet, square feet, gallons, or barrels.
Stores—In naval usage, this term is sometimes used
instead of the term "supplies" to denote any
article or commodity used by a naval ship or
station, such as equipage, consumable supplies,
clothing, petroleum product, medical supplie"
and ammunition.
Stowage diagram—See Diagram, stowage.
Stowage factor—The number which expresses the
space, in cubic feet, occupied by a long ton of any
commodity as prepared for shipment, including
all crating and packaging.
Support craft—Landing craft designed for the use
of rockets, mortars, and automatic weapons at
close range from seaward, both in support of an
assault against enemy-held beaches and of troops
continuing the inland attack.
Support group, amphibious—A task group of naval
vessels and/or craft assigned to furnish naval
gunfire support in an amphibious operation.
There is normally one support group to each
attack force. Two or more support groups are
generally joined to form a larger unit for bom
bardment during the advance force operations.
Each support group may contain two or more
support units.
293
Surf—The swell of the sea breaking upon a shore.
Table, consolidated vehicle—A summary of all ve
hicles loaded on a ship, listed by types, and show
ing the units to which they belong.
Tac-Log Group—Representatives designated by
troop commanders to assist Navy control officers
aboard control vessels in the ship-to-shore move
ment of troops, equipment, and supplies.
Tonnage—An expression of cubature or weight used
variously to indicate the aggregate of tons
shipped, carried, handled, mined, etc., also to
indicate a ship's weight, size, and carrying
capacity.
Ton—A unit of volume or weight. Volume:
Measurement (ship) ton—40 cubic feet.
Weight: Short ton—2,000 pounds;
Long ton (weight ton)—2,240 pounds;
Metric ton—2,205 pounds (1,000 kilo
grams) .
Deadweight tonnage—The carrying capacity of
a ship, expressed in long tons. It is the dif
ference between the displacement tonnage
loaded and displacement tonnage light.
Deadweight cargo tonnage—The cargo-carrying
capacity, expressed in long tons. It is the
part of the deadweight tonnage of the vessel
which remains after deducting the weight of
fuel, water, stores, dunnage, and other voy
age items. Also known as cargo capacity
tonnage.
Displacement tonnage—The weight of the ship
expressed in long tons. Light—total weight
of the ship excluding the weight of cargo,
passengers, fuel, water, stores, dunnage, etc.
294
 Loaded—total weight including all those
items listed above.
Gross tonnage—Total internal cubic capacity of
a ship expressed in tons of 100 cubic feet
capacity.
Tractor group—A group of landing ships in an am
phibious operation which carries the amphibious
vehicles of the landing force.
Transfer area—In an amphibious operation, the
water area* in which the transfer of troops and
supplies from landing craft to amphibious
vehicles is effected.
Transport division (TRANSDIV)—An administra
tive command of an amphibious force, normally
consisting of attack transports and attack cargo
ships in approximately the numbers required to
combat load the personnel, supplies, and equip
ment of one reinforced regiment. The transport
division is the nucleus for the formation of a
naval task component to lift one regimental com
bat team in amphibious operations.
Transport squadron (TRANSRON)—An adminis
trative command of an amphibious force consist
ing of two or more transport divisions. The
transport squadron is the nucleus for the forma
tion of a naval task component which will combat
load the personnel, supplies, and equipment of
one reinforced infantry division.
Vehicle debarkation priority table—A consolidated
list of all vehicles of a command listed by priority
of unloading according to the tactical plan.
Vessel—Any type of water craft larger than a row-
boat.

295
 APPENDIX VI

REFERENCES

1. Army Regulations (AR)

AR 220-60 Battalions—General Provi
sions.
AR 220-70 Companies—General Provi
sions.
AR 380-5 Safeguarding Military Infor
mation.
AR 711-20 Supply Economy.
AR 850-5 Marking of Clothing, Equip
ment, Vehicles and Prop
erty.
2. Special Regulations (SR)
SR 110-1-1 Index of Army Motion Pic
tures, Kinescope Record
ings, and Film Strips.
SR 310-20-3 Index of Training Publica
tions.
SR 310-20-4 Index of Technical Manuals,
Technical Regulations,
Technical Bulletins, Supply
Bulletins, Lubrication Or
ders, and Modification Work
Orders.
SR 320-5-1 Dictionary of United States
Army Terms.
SR 320-5-5 Dictionary of United States
Military Terms for Joint
Usage.
296
3. Field Manuals (FM)
FM 3-50 Chemical Smoke Generator
Battalion and Chemical
Smoke Generator Company.
FM 5-5 Engineer Troops Units.
FM 5-6 Operations of Engineer Troop
Units.
FM 5-9 Elementary Bridging.
FM 5-25 Explosives and Demolitions.
FM 5-34 Engineer Field Data.
FM 5-35 Engineer's Reference and
Logistical Data.
FM 8-25 Medical Services in Joint
Oversea Operations.
FM 17-34 Amphibious Tank and Tractor
Battalions.
FM 21-5 Military Training.
FM 21-8 Military Training Aids.
FM 21-22 Survival at Sea.
FM 21-105 Engineer Soldier's Handbook.
FM 22-10 Leadership.
FM 24-22 Combined Visual Signaling
(V/S) Procedure.
FM 30-5 (Title classified.)
FM 30-30 Aircraft Recognition Manual.
FM 31-5 (Title classified.)
FM 31-70 Basic Arctic Manual.
FM 31-71 Operations in the Arctic.
FM 31-72 Administration in the Arctic.
FM 55-25 Ports in Theaters of Opera
tion.
FM 55-150 Amphibian Truck Company.

297
 FM 60-5 Amphibious Operations Bat
talion in Assault Landings.
FM 60-10 (Title classified.)
FM 60-25 Employment of the Amphibi
ous Support Brigade.
FM 100-5 Field Service Eegulations—
Operations.
FM 100-10 Field Service Regulations-
Administration.
FM 100-11 Signal Communications Doc
trine.
FM 101-5 Staff Organization and Pro
cedure.
FM 101-10 Organization, Technical, and
Logistical Data.
4. Technical Manuals (TM)
TM 5-280 Construction in the Theater of
Operations.
TM 5-360 Port Construction and Re
habilitation.
TM 5-505 Maintenance of Engineer
Equipment.
TM 5-4000 Equipment Technical Man-
series, uals, issued with T/O&E
items of equipment.
TM 9-2900 Military Explosives.
TM 30-246 Tactical Interpretation of Air
Photos.
5. DA Pamphlets (DA)
8-12 What You Should Know
About Biological Warfare.
20-111 Survival Under Atomic At
tack.
298
6. Technical Bulletins
TB 5-255-4 Prefabricated Bituminous
Surfacing (PBS) for Ad
vanced Landing Fields.
TB 5-256-1 Expedients and Equipment
for Traversing Muddy Ter
rain.
ENG 13 Waterproofing of Engineer
Equipment for Deep-Water
Fording and Limited Oper
ations.
ENG 47 Snake, Demolition, M2A1.
7. United States Fleet Series (USF)
USF 6 Amphibious Warfare Instruc
tions, United States Fleets.
USF 63 Amphibious Instructions,
Landing Forces.
USF 66 Tactical and Operational In
structions, Amphibious
Forces.
8. Joint Army-Navy-Air Force Publications (JANAP)
144 Joint Amphibious Communi
cations.
9. Combined Communications Board Publications
(CCBP)
01 Combined Amphibious Com
munications : Instructions.
3-2 Combined Radiotelephone
(R/T) Procedure.

299
10. Miscellaneous
Army Advisory Panel on Joint
Amphibious Operations, 15
Jan 49, Army Field Forces.
TC 33, D/A 52 Combined Arms Units in
Atomic Warfare.

300
 INDEX

Para-
Craph Page
Activation, shore partj'_ _______________ 79 67
Adjutant_____________________________ 59,77 50,65
Administration. ___.__________________ 97 85
Administrative echelon, H & S Co_ _______ 36 39
Administrative plan____________________ 84 71
Administrative section, H & S Co________ 37 39
Administration and supply section, Bn . 23 31
Advance detachment, evacuation _________ 193 208
After-burst activities _ ________________ 232 233
Aids:
Planning._____________________. ___ 81 68
Training...________------__... _.. 124 109
Air Force shore party.__________________ 11 18
Air photos.-.-._-.._._._-----.-----.__ 81 68
Air raid security_ _______---__._______. 184 200
Alternate plans____-___-_--_-__________ 89 76
Amphibian trucks (DUKW)--_- 94,162,169,236 83,171,
184, 237
Amphibious construction bn ____________ 10 17
Amphibious support brigade.______ ___ 9,12-18 14,20
Amphibious support regiment ___________ 16 22
Amphibious operations:
Definitions ________________ _____ 4 7
Phases___ _____________________ 7 8
Purposes. _________________________ 5 7
Amphibious task force, components- . _. __ 8 13
Arctic operations ____________________ 218-228 224
Arctic region ___________________ __ 219 224
Armament:
Battalion ______________________ 26 35
H &SCo_____________--_-_-.__-_- 41 40
301
 Para-
Armament—Continued -™Pft Pa9«
Shore Co—--- — -- — - —------------ 52 46
Armorer.---- — - — ------------------- 39 39
Atomic attack— —— _____-___- — — - — _ 229-234 231
Automotive maintenance subsection. _____ 69 58
Barges, ponton—_- — _ — -_ — -- — -- — --- 168 177
Base development—.- — -- — -- — -- — -- 185-187 201
Base development plan_ — _ — __ — - — __ — 85 73
Battalion commander.___ — _-__ — __ — — 53-54 47
Battalion headquarters—-. —— — ___ — — 23 31
Battalion landing team (BLT)_________ 8 13
Beach:
Characteristics— — — — — — — — — — — 93 79
Classification, _____________________ 93 79
Exit roads——— —________________ 149 148
Reserves. —-_ — - — -- —------------ 84 71
Support area.. _ — — -_ —-_ — _ — — 146-163 143
Beachmaster unit-- — —__ — ____________ 10 17
Beach organization, priorities_________-._ 148 148
Biological warfare—------------------- 237 237
Bivouac area_ —— — - — _ — —— — __ — - — 179 195
BLT shore party, type.----------------- App. I 253
Boarding party-..--,------------------ 171 188
Boat assembly area--.-.---------------- 133 120
Boat:
Groups- — — - — — — — — — — — - — — 130 117
Teams..---- —-------------------- 130 117
Unit___ _______-__--__--___-______ 10 17
Waves. _._____-___-___- — ______ 130,135 117,124
Breaching:
Plans—___________________________ 138 129
Teams-.- — -- — - — -- —-- — -- — ---- 140 130
Bulldozers-------------------------- 116,168 99,177
Cadre training------------------------- 243 241
Camouflage----.---..------------.--- 95,230 84
Capabilities:
Amphibious support brigade. —— _-__ 13 20
Amphibious support regiment-—_____ 16 22
Engineer shore battalion____________ 20 29
Engineer shore company ____________ 44 41
302
 Para-
Cargo: craph Pace
Assembly _________________________ 114 98
Security___ _____________________ 172 189
Ticket---_________________________ 147 146
Cargo-handling rates.___________________ 167 176
Casualty evacuation____________________ 156 159
Causeways, ponton_______________ ______ 168 177
Cells, ponton-_____-_ ________________ 168 177
Chemical warfare. ___-__-_-_.__-_____. 235 235
Civilians, evacuation---.-.-.-....---- 160,200 170,210
Combat loading_____________________ 115 98
Command post_.-._._.._-...._._-_-. _ 155 158
Command section, H & S Co_ __--_----__ 31 36
Commercial loading_.____ _________ 115 98
Communications:
Battalion..-.._. ________ 72-74,99 62,87
Beach-._____________________ ___ 157 163
H&S Co-_---__-_________________- 42 41
Shore Co___.........._...-...... 48 44
Communication:
Center________________________ 157 163
Equipment.__________ ___. _._ 114,127,214 98,110,
221
Communications section, Bn_.__.__ _____ 23,73 31,62
Communications training-______________ 123 107
Company commander, H & S Co___------ 32 36
Condition of readiness--,_______________ 133 120
Consolidation________________________ 185 201
Control station..----.------_..-----. 151,169 153,184
Convoy loading_____.__________________ 115 98
Corps shore party, type________________ App. I 253
Cranes----_-_____--_--______________ 114,168 98,177
Critique.---_-_-_____________________ 107 89
Debarkation:
Drills___---___.______„____-.---- 126 110
Stations_________________________ 130 117
Decontamination_________._.__________ 234 234
Defense_----_-______---_-_______ 179,180-184 195
Defense, atomic_............-..----.- 231 233
Definitions______.______________-___- 4, App. V 7,265

303
 Para
graph Page
Demonstration.----- . - _-__---_---_ 5 7
Denial operations------- ___-_-_-_-_ 201 211
Dewaterproofing_ . - . . _ _._-_____--__-_ 152 155
Directive, planning-.------------------- 78 66
Division engineers.-.------------------- 144 136
Division shore party, type---_-___--___- App. I 253
Drills-,--- ------------------------- 126 110
DUKWY's. --------- __---- 94, 162, 169, 236 83,171,
184, 237
Dumps----------------- 143,145,158,185,213 135,137,
167, 201,
221

Element "C".------------------------ 137 126

Embarkation --_--.__---_--______-_-- 108-127 90
Embarkation:
Area-__--_ _ - . -.. ---------- _ 110 93
Group.--- ---_----_-.-_---___-_ 108 90
Officer -.__.__.__-_-____-_ 119 105
Order..- -._--__--._.----_---_--.. 108 90
Plan-.---...... ..--..---....------- 108 90
Team-__--_---------._....--..._-- 108 90
Emergency maintenance.. -.-.-.-_-__ 153 155
Enemy capabilities--------.-.---_--_-._ 91 78
Engineer equipment subsection_._____..__ 69 " 58
Engineer parts specialist.-___---____---_ 69 58
Envelopment, waterborne. __-.____-____ 203 212
Equipment:
Arctic- --_.-- -.-.----.._.-...---_ 224 229
Battalion. ___.... ....._-...._--... 25 34
Communication....-----.---------- 114 98
Equipment-repair platoon--.___.__- 47 44
H & S Co___ ----_--__----_-_--_- 40 40
Rehearsals.-.- _.-.--__--____-_ 105 89
Shore Co_-._---_._._-_________-_ 51 46
Unloading..-----. _-_----__--_____- 168 177
Equipment-repair platoon..--.-..-.--__ 47,153 44,155
Equipment section, Bn_--.__--.--_-__. 23,71 31,61
Evacuation, civilians-_-_-_.-_._______ 160, 200 170, 210
Evacuation station-.---__ ---------- 156 159

304
Executive officer: graph page
Battalion-----_--____--______----- 55,58 48,50
H &SCo--_-__-__-__-___---_-__-_ 33 37
Exit roads___-._.-----__.------_-_-... 149 148
Final phase-------------__--_-„------- 7 8
Final preparations, debarkation._________ 127 110
Fire fighting- __-_-_-_ _ _._--- 65, 158, 228, 235 55, 167,
230, 235
First sergeant, H & S Co--__-__-_--_---- 34 38
Floating sumps____--______--_--_ 129,145,169 113,137,
184
Fork-lift trucks--.--.----------------.- 168 177
Frost table--.------.-------.---------- 221 226
Generators.--------------------------- 116 99
General cargo-------------------------- 116 99
General unloading-..--__-._____-.__ 164-172 173
Hatch crews---------.----.--------- 164,167 173
Headquarters:
Engineer Shore Bn____-.-_-__-_-_-_ 23 31
H & S Co--_--_,------ ---------- 30 36
Shore Co-------------------------- 46 42
H & S Co, Bn----._------------------- 28-42 36
Health conditions-__.------_---__-_-_-_ 95 84
Helicopters---------.--------.---.----- 156 159
Horned scully------------------------- 137 126
Hydrography-------,---.-__-__--____ 93 79
Individual reserves..__-____-_-_-_______ 84 71
Infantry, employment as-___-____--—__ 182 199
Information center.__-_-_________-_--__ 154 156
Initial reserves----------_------------ 84 71
Initial supply procedure.-.------ ——— -.. 145 137
Inspections-------..------____-._.. 125 109
Intelligence-.-----.--------------_- 60,159 51,169
Intelligence annex...__-____-_—_---_--- 90 77
Invasion--______-.___-_-----------_---_ 5 7
Jungle operations------------_----- 212-217 220
Labor details____--___-_____.. 121 106

305
305640—54———20
Landmg:
T , •
graph
-
Page
Categories__-___-_---_ ___ _--___._ 129 113
Exercises-----...-----— --------- 248 243
Force— --.--------- — — .------- 8 ' 13
Sequence.- __-._._ ___ -____-__-_-_ 128 112
Landing force reserves, supply. _.___-,___ 84 71
Landing force supplies---------..------. 129 113
Lateral roads__--__------..------------- 149 148
Levels, supply- -_-___-__----_-__----_._ 84 71
Liaison section_-__---__--___ ___ — _ 142,157 133,163
Lighterage-------------------------- 164,167 173,176
Loading:
Equipment____-_--_____ _ -___ _ _ 196 209
Plans.------------ — ------------. 122 95
Procedure__--_-__-_--__---_---__ 119-121 105
Sequence________----__- ___ __-__- 121 106
Time..---.----------------------- 118 104
Local labor——— -____---___--.--_ 95,163,225 84,172
239
Local materials..---------- -_-_-_--_-_- 95 84
Logistics plan. _-__.__---.___-__--__.._ 84 71
Logistical support operations ------------ 204 214
---.---...-.-..------------.--- 172 189
Maintenance. — -- — _ — -.— 66, 70, 153, 214 55, 60,
155, 221
Maintenance officer, Bn-.-_-_ __ -_-____ 66,71 55,61
Maintenance section, Bn----_-_- -------- 23,67 31,57
Maintenance supervisor. ________________ 68 58
Maps:
Relief _______ ___ ________________ 81 68
Situation--..-- _ -______-____.._ 147,154 146,156
Markers, beach-_-_---_-__-__-______-__ 144 136
Marking equipment. _,_--____--_____- 114,117 98,104
Medical detachment.-. — -.___-. 24, 75, 156, 178 32, 63,
159, 195
Medical prepartions....--- __.____.___- 100 87
Medical service. _----__--__--„___-__-- 156 159
Message center... __ -------- _ ..... 73,155 62,158
Messing. __ ... _ ___ -.- — ___.____ 177 194
Mess section, H & S Co--.-- __ ___ _.._ 39 39
306
 graph Page
Military police—-------- 151,154,161,197,200 153,156,
170, 209,
210
Mines-.--...------.------.---------. 137,181 126,196
Mission:
Amphibious support brigade.-------- 12 20
Amphibious support regiment..______ 16 22
Engineer shore battalion ____________ 19 29
Engineer shore company ____________ 43 41
Headquarters and service company. _. 28 36
Movement phase.-.---.---.------------ 7 8
Movement, types of.___________________ 6 8
Native labor..._..._-..-..... 95, 163, 199, 225 84, 172,
210, 229
Naval beach group.--..--..-..-.__--.__ 10 17
Naval control organization______________ 131 118
Navigable-river operations_.--____-___-_ 205 214
Near-shore operations__.__-_______--__ 109-11 92
Near-shore support-_______.____________ 9 14
Night:
Landings_--__-__.___-__--_---.-_ 207 216
Operations-.-.-__-.-.__-_-__-._-_- 176 194
Nonscheduled aerials.--.__---.-----.-.- 129 113
Obstacles, types.__-__..-..__--------_ 137 126
On-call waves___..___-_-_-______----- 129 113
Operations officer-__-__-__----- 60,61,173,239 51,52,
192, 240
Operation order:
Battalion.._-__--_. __.___._______. 88 75
Division. __.__.-___-______.__--.-_ 86 74
Operations plan___._.,__----_-_---__- 83,87 70,75
Operations section, Bn____-----.-----__. 23 31
Orderlies.-------------.----..------.-- 35 38
Organization:
Amphibious support brigade..----__. 14 20
Amphibious support regiment__-._... 16 22
Battalion staff,-... .----__._.____-. 57 49
Engineer shore battalion....._____._ 21 29

307
Organization—Continued graph Page
H &SCo_.-•-.-.------------------ 29 36
Shore company_.__-_. — _ — -_ — - — - 45 42
Organization, defense._-_.-___---___--__ 181 196
Organizational loading. __.-_____--__-_ — 115 98
Orientation--.------.__--__-_---_------ 124 109
Outloading procedure._ — — — — — — — - — 195 208

Packing lists—--___-_._-__-___.___-.__ 117 104

Pallets—---------------------------- 168 177
Perimeter....._--__.__-.__-___-- 179,180,181 195,196
Permafrost.... —_-_-__-_-.__ — __-_--__ 221 226
Phases, joint operation.--_..-__._-_-___- 7 8
Plan:
Base development-----------.--.--. 85 73
Loading._ — ._ — — __ — _ — -_-_. — - 122 95
Shore party—------------ 84, 85, App. II 71,73,260
Withdrawal.... — — — —— — — — .— 188 205
Planning directive--..--------------..-- 78 66
Planning, beach operation s._-___-_ _--_.. 90 77
Plans------.---.------------.-----.--- 77 65
Ponton:
Barges.. —-_-_--_ — — __- — ,_ — — -- 168 177
Causeways — --- — .------__. — __— 168 177
Cells--...-_---_---_------.------- 168 177
Port companies.-__-___--__--._--_-_--- 121 106
Port operations-.--......-------.-_--_- 187 203
Preparatory phase_--_-_-___--_-..____-- 7 S
Priorities:
Base development_ — — _ — — — __— 186 202
Beach organization.-.--._--._--__-- 148 148
Destruction,.--___-. ______..__ — __ 201 211
Prisoners of war.-.._.--_._._._..__..._ 159 169
Pyrotechnics-----.-.-------.--..------ 116 99

Radio subsection------.----..____ — __— 73 62

Radiological defense._ — _ — — _ — __ — __ 233, 251 234, 245
Raids__--_-__....._._. — _____- 5,206 7,215
RCT shore party, type___-. — - — — — - App. I 253
Readiness, condition of.---._---__--__-- 133 120

308
 Para
graph Page
Reconnaissance party___________ 136,142,143 124,
133, 135
Records-__-i_____--___--___-.___--_- 147,158 .46,167
Refugees_...____________________ 200 210
Regimental landing team (RLT) _________ 8 13
Rehearsals...__--_-____--_____.___ 101-107 88
Rendevous area—--__---_--_.„___---__- 135 124
Reorganization:
Defense_________________________ 183 199
Evacuation_._______ — ________.._ 191 207
Reports—-_--_-_-____---___--____-_--_ 147 146
Resupply_-----__-_--_-----_------___- 171 188
Roads.__-.-_---_-___._--___-_-_ 149,216,226 148,223,
229
Rolle conveyors--____-._-__-_______--_ 168 177
Salvage-__________.____-_-._______-___ 153 155
Sandbags-----___----__,-------------- 168 177
Sanitation-_--_-_-__-__-_-__----____--- 178 195
Scheduled \vaves----_-__---__--_----_ 104,129 88,113
Schools---_-_____---------_----------- 257 249
Security:
Airraid-.---------------.-------- 184 200
Beach area-----_--__--_-_-----_--- 180 195
Cargo...------------------------- 172 189
Evacuation---__-_-.-----__-_----- 198 210
Planning-.-__------___.----____--- 80 68
Seizure.------------.----------------- 5 7
Selective unloading...--.--__-_----__- 145,166 137,176
Sequence, withdrawal_________________ 194 208
Shift operation__....._.. — .-_....._ 57,175, 49,193,
177 194
Ship-based training---_--_-.--_---__. 258-259 251
Shipboard training....__,--.--_.___-.-- 123 107
Shipping types, capabilities. —-__— 113, App. Ill 96 facing
p. 262
Ship's platoon...--..-...-__-_---__-___ 164 173
Ship-to-shore movement..-__-__---___-- 6,210 8,219
Shop subsection..-._------___-------_-- 69 58
Shore-based training —------_-_-__- 258-259 251
309
 Para
graph Page
Shore platoon--__-___--___-__---___-.__ 49 45
Shore section.------------------------- 50 46
Shore-to-shore:
Movement.---__--_______-___-___- 6 8
Operations-..-.-_-__--______--__ 202-206 212
Signs-.____--_____-_--__-___-______- 151 153
Sites, training--.------.--------------- 255 248
Situation map.-..------------------- 147,154 146,156
Sled pallets.__--_-___________-___--__-- 168 177
Smokes------------------------------- 236 237
Soil stabilization.....___.___.___.__-._- 150 150
Staff:
Augmentation.-____-___-__-___--__ 96 85
Training-...------.-_-______--__-- 252 246
Staging area, evacuation.___-„__--__--_- 192 207
Standing operation procedure _._______- 55, 155, 48, 158,
235, 237, 235, 237,
App. IV 263
Stragglers_----_______-_-__-_--_._.__-. 161 170
Subarctic region..-.._-.-_-..___._.__-- 219 224
Supply economy-______.___-___-_____- 56,241 49,240
Supply levels---.----------_---_--_._-- 84 71
Supply officer_-_---_---_---__--___- 62,98,173 53,86,190
Supply section:
H&S Co...__-___--_-___-___-__._ 39 39
Shore Co---_-_______--___-__.-___. 46 42
Supply sergeant.--._-____-____.-_-_-___ 39 39
Surfacing materials..._________________ 150 150
Surgeon__---_____-___-_--__..-..-_. 76 64
Tactical-Logistical group__--__ 132,142,145,165 118,133,
137, 174
Tactical plan---.__-.__--_-___-___-___. 92 79
Tides-..._____________________________ 93 79
Tractor squadron..___.___-_-_-__-__._- 108 90
Traffic control-......--..-------.. 94,151,197 83,153,
209
Training:
Aids—--------------------------- 124 109
Cadre-----------------_---------_ 243 241
3JO
Training—Continued graph Page
Shipboard----. ____________________ 123 107
Tests--__----_-___-_______________ 242 241
Transfer line______-____--________-_-__ 170 187
Transport:
Division. _________________________ 108 90
Group_-_-_-____________________ 108 90
Squadron..-._____________________ 108 90
Transportation battalion._______________ 27 35
Transportation boat bn._______________ 17, 164 27, 173
Two-shift operation.. ________________ 175,177 193,194
Type assemb]y-_--.________---.-___. 114 98
Underwater demolition teams__________ 128, 139 111, 129
Underwater obstacles-_----___ _________ 137 126
Unit assembly..--..-._________________ 114 98
Unitloading_-_-__-___________. ________ 115 98
Unloading:
Arctic.. __________________________ 223 228
Equipment.____ ___________________ 168 177
General--_-______________.______ 164-172 173
Selective-----________-___-__--_- 145,166 137,176
Vehicle assembly area.--.-______---_-._ 153 155
Vehicles, loading----_-.___-_-_------_-- 116 99
Waterborne envelopment--_.___.__-_____ 203 212
Water supply_ _._-______. 64, 95, 162, 217, 227 55, 84
171, 223,
230
Weather-.-._---____________-_-_-___-_ 93 79
Wire entanglements..-.________________ 137 126
Wire subsection_-__-__-________--______ 73 62
Withdrawal plan.._____________________ 188 205
Working conditions___________________ 174 192
[AG 322 (16 Jun 54)]

311
 BT ORDER OP THE SECRETARY OF THE ARMY:

M. B. RIDGWAY,
General, United States Army,
OFFICIAL: Chief of Staff.
JOHN A. KLEIN,
Major General, United States Army,
The Adjutant General.
DISTRIBUTION:
Active Army:
Gen Staff, DA (2) 5-17, Engr Co (C)
Tec Svc, DA (1) (Div) (2)
Tec Svc Bd (1) 5-35A, Engr Bn (C)
AFF (5) (A) (2)
OS Maj Comd (10) 5-36A, Hq, Hq & Svc
OS Base Comd (1) Co, Engr Bn (C)
Log Comd (2) (A) (5)
MOW (2) 5r37A, Engr Co (C)
Annies (5) (A) (2)
Corps (2) 5-48A, Engr Sup
Div (5) Point Co (2)
Engr Brig (1) 5-67, Engr Co (Water
Engr Regt (1) Sup) (2)
Ft & Cp (2) 5-157, Engr Fid Maint
USMA (10) Co (2)
Engr Sch (25) 5-192A, Hq & Hq Co,
PMST Engr ROTC Engr Gp (4)
units (1) 5-215, Armed Engr
Gen Depots (2) Bn (4)
POE (2) 5-262, Hq & Hq Co,
Engr Div (1) Engr Gp (Maint &
Engr Dist (1) Sup) (2)
Mil Dist (1) 5-301A, Hq & Hq Co,
Units organized under Engr Brig (4)
following T/O & E's: 5-312A, Hq & Hq Co,
5-15, Engr Bn (C) Engr Cons Gp (4)
(C) (Div) (2) 5-315A, Engr Cons
5-16, Hq, Hq & Svc Bn (4)
Co, Engr Bn (C) 5-329A, Engr Co
(Div) (5) (Port Cons) (2)

312
DISTRIBUTION :
Active Army:
5-367, Engr Lt Eqp 5-526A, Hq, Hq &
Co (2) Svc Co, Engr Bn
5-500A (AA through (Shore) (5)
AD), Admin Teams 5-527A, Co, Engr Bn
(2) (Shore) (2)
5-525A, Engr Bn
(Shore) (2)
NG: None.
USAR: None.
Unless otherwise noted, distribution applies to ConUS
and overseas.
For explanation of abbreviations used, see SR 320-50-1.

313